Class 12

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Chemistry Book Solutions Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Chemistry Chapter 4 Chemical Kinetics

PSEB 12th Class Chemistry Guide Chemical Kinetics InText Questions and Answers

Question 1.
From the rate expression for the following reactions, determine their order of reaction and the dimensions of the rate constants.
(i) 3 NO(g) → N₂O(g) Rate = k[NO]²
(ii) H₂O₂ (aq) +3I^– (aq) + 2H⁺ → 2H₂O (l) + \(\mathbf{I}_{3}^{-}\)
Rate = k[H₂O₂] [I^–]
(iii) CH₃CHO(g) → CH₄(g) + CO(g) Rate = k [CH₃CHO]^3/2
(iv) C₂H₅Cl(g) → C₂H₄(g) + HCl (g) Rate = k [C₂H₅Cl]
Solution:
(i) Given, rate = k [NO]²
Therefore, order of the reaction = 2
Dimension of rate constant (k) = \(\frac{\text { Rate }}{[\mathrm{NO}]^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{m o l L^{-1} s^{-1}}{\left(m o l L^{-1}\right)^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{\mathrm{~mol}^{2} \mathrm{~L}^{-2}}\)
= L mol^-1 s^-1

(ii) Given, rate = k [H₂O₂] [I^– ]
Therefore, order of the reaction = 2
Dimension of k = \(\frac{\text { Rate }}{\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{2}\right]\left[\mathrm{I}^{-}\right]}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{\left(\mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~L}^{-1}\right)\left(\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1}\right)}\)
= L mol^-1 s^-1

(iii) Given rate = k[CH₃CHO]^3/2
Therefore, order of the reaction = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
Dimension of k = \(\frac{\text { Rate }}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{CHO}\right]^{3 / 2}}\)

= \(\frac{\text { mol L }^{-1} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{\mathrm{~mol}^{\frac{3}{2}} \mathrm{~L}^{-\frac{3}{2}}}\)
= mol ^-1/2L^1/2 s^-1

(iv) Given, rate = k [C₂H₅Cl]
Therefore, order of the reaction = 1
Dimension of k = \(\frac{\text { Rate }}{\left[\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5} \mathrm{Cl}\right]}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{\mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~L}^{-1}}\) = s^-1

Question 2.
For the reaction:
2A + B → A₂B
the rate = k[A] [B]² with k = 2.0 x 10^-6 mol^-2L²s^-1. Calculate the initial rate of the reaction when [A] = 0.1 mol L^-1, [B] = 0.2 mol L^-1. Calculate the rate of reaction after [A] is reduced to 0.06 mol L^-1.
Solution:
The initial rate of the reaction is
Rate = k [A][B]²
= (2.0 × 10^-6 mol^-2 L² s^-1) (0.1 mol L^-11) (0.2 mol L^-1 )²
= 8.0 × 10^-9 mol L^-1 s^-1
When [A] is reduced from 0.1 mol L^-1 to 0.06 molL^-1, the concentration of A reacted = (0.1 – 0.06) mol L^-1 = 0.04 mol L^-1 Therefore, concentration of B reacted
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 0.04 mol L^-1 = 0.02 mol L^-1
Then, concentration of B available, [B] = (0.2 -0.02) mol L^-1
= 0.18 mol L^-1
After [A] is reduced to 0.06 mol L^-1, the rate of the reaction is given by,
Rate = k [A][B]²
= (2.0 × 10^-6 mol^-2 L² s^-1) (0.06 mol L^-1) (0.18 mol L^-1)²
= 3.89 × 10^-9 mol L^-1 s^-1

Question 3.
The decomposition of NH₃ on platinum surface is zero order reaction. What are the rates of production of N₂ and H₂ if k = 2.5 x 10^-4 mol^-1 L s^-1?
Solution:
The decomposition of NH₃ on platinum surface is represented by the following equation

For zero order reaction, rate = k
∴ \(-\frac{1}{2} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{NH}_{3}\right]}{d t}=\frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2}\right]}{d t}=\frac{1}{3} \frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]}{d t}\)
= 2.5 × 10^-4 mol L^-1 s^-1
Therefore, the rate of production of N₂
\(\frac{d\left[\mathrm{~N}_{2}\right]}{d t}\) = 2.5 × 10^-4 mol L^-1 s^-1
The rate of production of H₂
\(\frac{d\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]}{d t}\) = 3 × 2.5 × 10^-4 mol L^-1 s^-1
= 7.5 × 10^-4 mol L^-1 s^-1

Question 4.
The decomposition of dimethyl ether leads to the formation of CH₄, H₂ and CO and the reaction rate is given by
Rate = k [CH₃OCH₃]^3/2
The rate of reaction is followed by increase in pressure in a closed vessel, so the rate can also be expressed in terms of the partial pressure of dimethyl ether, i.e.,
Rate = k(PCH_3OCH3 )^3/2
If the pressure is measured in bar and time in minutes, then what are the units of rate and rate constants?
Solution:
If the pressure is measured in bar and time in minutes, then
Unit of rate = bar min^-1
Rate = k(PCH_3OCH3 )^3/2
⇒ k = \(\frac{\text { Rate }}{\left(p_{\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{OCH}_{3}}\right)^{3 / 2}}\)
=

Question 5.
Mention the factors that affect the rate of a chemical reaction.
Answer:
The factors that affect the rate of a chemical reaction are as follows :
(i) Nature of reactants: Ionic substances react more rapidly than covalent compounds because ions produced after dissociation are immediately available for reaction.

(ii) Concentration of reactants: Rate of a chemical reaction is direcdy proportional to the concentration of reactants.

(iii) Temperature: Generally rate of a reaction increases on increasing the temperature.

(iv) Presence of catalyst: In presence of catalyst, the rate of reaction generally increase and the equilibrium state is attained quickly in reversible reactions.

(v) Surface area of the reactants: Rate of reaction increases with increase in surface area of the reactants. That is why powdered form of reactants is preffered than their granular form.

Question 6.
A reaction is second order with respect to a reactant. How is the rate of reaction affected if the concentration of the reactant is (i) doubled (ii) reduced to half?
Solution:
Let the concentration of the reactant be [A] = a
Rate of reaction, R = k [A]² = ka²
(i) If the concentration of the reactant is doubled, i.e. [A] = 2a, then the rate of the reaction would be
R’ = k (2a)²
= 4ka² = 4R
Therefore, the rate of the reaction would increase by 4 times.

Question 7.
What is the effect of temperature on the rate constant of a reaction? How can this effect of temperature on rate constant be represented quantitatively?
Answer:
The rate constant is nearly doubled with a rise in temperature by 10° for a chemical reaction.

The temperature effect on the rate constant can be represented quantitatively by Arrhenius equation, k = Ae^-E_a/RT

Where, k is the rate constant, A is the Arrhenius factor or the frequency factor, R is the gas constant, T is the temperature, and E_a is the energy of activation for the reaction.

Question 8.
In a pseudo first order hydrolysis of ester in water, the following results were obtained:

t/s	0	30	60	90
[Ester]/molL-1	0.55	0.31	0.17	0.085

(i) Calculate the average rate of reaction between the time interval 30 to 60 seconds.
(ii) Calculate the pseudo first order rate constant for the hydrolysis of ester.
Solution:
(i) Average rate of reaction between the time interval, 30 to 60 seconds
= \(\frac{d[\text { Ester }]}{d t}\)
= \(\frac{0.31-0.17}{60-30}\)
= \(\frac{0.14}{30}\)
= 4.67 × 10^-3 mol L^-1 s^-1

Question 9.
A reaction is first order in A and second order in B.
(i) Write the differential rate equation.
(ii) How is the rate affected on increasing the concentration of B three times?
(iii) How is the rate affected when the concentrations of both A and B are doubled?
Solution:
(i) The differential rate equation will be
– \(\frac{d[\mathrm{R}]}{d t}\) = k[A][B]²

(ii) If the concentration of B is increased three times, then
– \(\frac{d[\mathrm{R}]}{d t}\) = k[A][3B]²
= 9.k [A][B]²
Therefore, the rate of reaction will increase 9 times.

(iii) When the concentrations of both A and B are doubled,
– \(\frac{d[\mathrm{R}]}{d t}\) = k[2A][2B]²
= 8.k [A] [B]²
Therefore, the rate of reaction will increase 8 times.

Question 10.
In a reaction between A and B, the initial rate of reaction (r₀) was measured for different initial concentrations of A and B as given below:

A/mol L-1	0.20	0.20	0.40
B/mol L-1	0.30	0.10	0.05
r0/mol L-1 s-1	5.07 × 10-5	5.07 × 105	1.43 × 10-4

What is the order of the reaction with respect to A and B?
Solution:
Let the order of the reaction with respect to A be x and with respect to B be y.
Therefore
r₀ = k [A]^x [B]^y
5.07 × 10^-5 = k[0.20]^x [0.30]^y …………. (i)
5.07 × 10^-5 = k[0.20]^x [0.10]^y …………. (ii)
1.43 × 10^-4 = k[0.40]^x [0.05]^y ……….. (iii)

Hence, the order of the reaction with respect to A is 1.5 and with respect to B is 0.

Question 11.
The following results have been obtained during the kinetic studies of the reaction:
2A + B → C + D

Determine the rate law and the rate constant for the reaction.
Solution:
Let the order of the-reaction with respect to A be x and with respect to B be y.
Therefore, rate of the reaction is given by,
Rate = k [A]^x [B]^y According to the question,
6.0 × 10^-3; = k[0.1]^x [0.1]^y …………. (i)
7.2 × 10^-2 = k[0.3]^x [0.2]^y …………… (ii)
2.88 × 10^-1 = k[0.3]^x [0.4]^y ………….. (iii)
2.40 × 10^-2 = k[0.4]^x [0.1]^y …………… (iv)
Dividing equation (iv) by (i), we get

Question 12.
The reaction between A and B is first order with respect to A and zero order with respect to B. Fill in the blanks in the following table:

Solution:
The given reaction is of the first order with respect to A and of zero order with respect to B.
Therefore, the rate of the reaction is given by,
Rate = k[A]¹[B]⁰
⇒ Rate = fc[A]
From experiment I, we get
2.0 × 10^-2 molL^-1 min^-1 = k(0.1 molL^-1)
⇒ k = 0.2 min^-1

From experiment II, we get
4.0 × 10^-2 molL^-1 min^-1 = 0.2 min^-1 [A]
⇒ [A] = 0.2 mol L^-1

From experiment III, we get
Rate = 0.2 min^-1; × 0.4 mol L^-1
= 0.08 mol L^-1 min^-1

From experiment IV, we get
2.0 × 10^-2 molL^-1 min^-1 = 0.2 min^-1 [A]
⇒ [A] = 0.1 mol L^-1

Question 13.
Calculate the half-life of a first order reaction from their rate constants given below:
(i) 200 s^-1
(ii) 2 min^-1
(iii) 4 years^-1
Solution:
Half life period for first order reaction, t_1/2 = \(\)
(i) t_1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{200 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\) = 0.347 × 10^-2 s
= 3.47 × 10^-3 s
(ii) t_1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{2 \min ^{-1}}\) = 0.35 mm
(iii) t_1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{4 \text { years }^{-1}}\)= 0.173 years 4 years-1

Question 14.
The half-life for radioactive decay of ¹⁴C is 5730 years. An archaeological artifact containing wood had only 80% of the ¹⁴C found in a living tree. Estimate the age of the sample.
Solution:
Decay constant (k) = \(\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}}\)
\(\frac{0.693}{5730}\) = years ^-1
Radioactive decay follows first order kinetics
t = \(\frac{2.303}{k}\) = log\(\frac{[R]_{0}}{[R]}\)
= \(\frac{\frac{2.303}{0.693}}{5730}\) × log \(\frac{100}{80}\)
= 1845 years
Hence, the age of the sample is 1845 years.

Question 15.
The experimental data for decomposition of N₂0₅
[2N₂O₅ → 4NO₂ + O₂]
in gas phase at 318K are given below:

(i) Plot [N₂O₅] against t.
(ii) Find the half-life period for the reaction.
(iii) Draw a graph between log [N₂O₅ ] and t.
(iv) What is the rate law?
(v) Calculate the rate constant
(vi) Calculate the half-life period from k and compare it with (ii).
Solution:
(i) The plot of [N₂O₅] against time is given below:

(ii) Initial concentration of N₂O₅ = 1.63 x 10^-2 M
Half of this concentration = 0.815 x 10^-2 M
Time corresponding to this concentration = 1440 s
Hence t_1/2 = 1440 s

(iii) For graph between log[N₂O₅] and time, we first find the values of log[N₂O₅]

Time (s)	102 × [N2O5] mol L-1	log [N2O5]
0	1.63	-1.79
400	1.36	-1.87
800	1.14	-1.94
1200	0.93	-2.03
1600	0.78	-2.11
2000	0.64	-2.19
2400	0.53	-2.28
2800	0.43	-2.37
3200	0.35	-2.46

(iv) The given reaction is of the first order as the plot, log [N₂0₅] v/s t, is a straight line. Therefore, the rate law of the reaction is
Rate = k [N₂O₅]

(v) From the plot, log [N₂O₅] v/s t, we get
Slope = \(\frac{-2.46-(-1.79)}{3200-0}\)
= \(\frac{-0.67}{3200}\)
Again, slope of the line of the plot log [N₂O₅] v/s t is given by
– \(\frac{k}{2.303}\)
Therefore we get
\(-\frac{k}{2.303}=-\frac{0.67}{3200}\)
k = \(\frac{0.67 \times 2.303}{3200}\)
= 4.82 × 10^-4s^-1

(vi) Half-life period (t_1/2) = \(\)
= \(\frac{0.693}{4.82 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\) = 1438 s
Half-life period (t_1/2) is calculated from the formula and slopes are approximately the same.

Question 16.
The rate constant for a first order reaction is 60 s^-1. How much time will it take to reduce the initial concentration of the reactant to its 1/16^th value?
Solution:
For first order reaction
t = \(\frac{2.303}{k}\) log \(\frac{1}{(a-x)}\) …………. (i)
Given (a – x) = \(\frac{1}{16}\); k= 60 s^-1
Placing the values in equation (i)
t = \(\frac{2.303}{60 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\) log \(\frac{a \times 16}{a}\)
= \(\frac{2.303}{60 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\) log16 \(\frac{2.303}{60 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\) × 4 log 2
= \(\frac{2.303}{60 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\) × 4 × 0.3010
= 4.6 × 10^-2s
Hence, the required time is 4.6 × 10^-2 s.

Question 17.
During nuclear explosion, one of the products is ⁹⁰Sr with half-life of 28.1 years. If 1μ g of ⁹⁰Sr was absorbed in the bones of a newly born baby instead of calcium, how much of it will remain after 10 years and 60 years if it is not lost metabolically.
Solution:
As radioactive disintegration follows first order kinetics,
∴ Decay constant of ⁹⁰Sr, k = \(\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}}\)
= \(\frac{0.693}{28.1 \mathrm{y}}\) = 2.466 × 10^-2y^-1

To calculate the amount left after 10 years
[R]₀ = 1μg, t = 10 years, k = 2.466 × 10^-2y^-1,[R] =?
k = \(\frac{2.303}{t}\) log \(\frac{[R]_{0}}{[R]}\)
2.466 × 10^-2 = \(\frac{2.303}{10}\) log \(\frac{1}{[R]}\)
or log[R] = – 0.1071
or [Rl = Antilog \(\overline{1}\).8929 = 0.78 14 μg

To calculate the amount left after 60 years
2.466 × 10^-2 = \(\frac{2.303}{60}\) log \(\frac{1}{[R]}\)
or log[R] = – 0.6425
or [R] = Antilog \(\overline{1}\).3575 = 0.2278 μg

Question 18.
For a first order reaction, show that time required for 99% completion is twice the time required for the completion of 90% of reaction.
Solution:
For a first order reaction, the time required for 99% completion is

Therefore, t₁ = 2t₂
Hence, the time required for 99% completion of a first order reaction is twice the time required for the completion of 90% of the reaction.

Question 19.
A first order reaction takes 40 min for 30% decomposition.
Calculate t_1/2
Solution:
Given, t = 40 min,
For a first order reaction,

Question 20.
For the decomposition of azoisopropane to hexane and nitrogen at 543 K, the following data are obtained.

t (sec)	P(mm of Hg)
0	35.0
360	54.0
720	63.0

Calculate the rate constant.
Solution:
The decomposition of azoisopropane to hexane and nitrogen at 543 K is represented by the following equation:

Hence, the average value of rate constant
k = \(\frac{\left(2.175 \times 10^{-3}\right)+\left(2.235 \times 10^{-3}\right)}{2} s^{-1}\)
= 2.21 × 10^-3s^-1

Question 21.
The following data were obtained during the first order thermal decomposition of SO₂Cl₂ at a constant volume.
SO₂Cl₂(g) → SO₂(g) + Cl₂(g)

Experiment	Time/s-1	Total pressure/atm
1	0	0.5
2	100	0.6

Calculate the rate of the reaction when total pressure is 0.65 atm.
Solution:
The first order thermal decomposition of SO₂cl₂ at a constant volume is represented by the following equation:

= 2.23 × 10^-3s^-1

When P_t = 0.65 atm,
P₀ + p = 0.65
⇒ p = 0.65 – P₀
= 0.65 – 0.5
= 0.15 atm
Pressure of SO₂Cl₂ at time t (P_SO2Cl2 SO₂Cl₂
= P₀ – P
= 0.5 – 0.15
= 0.35 atm

Therefore, the rate of equation, when total pressure is 0.65 atm, is given by,
Rate = k × (P_SO2Cl2 SO₂Cl₂)
= (2.23 × 10^-3 s^-1) (0.35 atm)
= 7.8 × 10^-5 atm s^-1

Question 22.
The rate constant for the decomposition of N₂O₅ at various temperatures is given below:

Draw a graph between In k and 1/T and calculate the values of A and E_a.
Predict the rate constant at 30° and 50°C.
Solution:
To draw the plot of log k versus 1/T, we can rewrite the given data as follows:

From graph, we find
Slope = \(\frac{-2.4}{0.00047}\) = 5106.38
E_a = – Slope × 2.303 × R
= – (- 5106.38) × 2.303 × 8.314
= 97772.58 J mol^-1
= 97.77258 kJ mol^-1

We know that,
log k = log A – \(\frac{E_{a}}{2.303 R T}\)
log k = log \(\left[-\frac{E_{a}}{2.303 R}\right] \frac{1}{T}\) = log A
Compare it with y = mx + c (which is equation of line in intercept form)
log A = value of intercept on y-axis i.e.
on log k-axis [y₂ – y₁ = -1 – (-7.2)]
= (-1 + 7.2) = 6.2 ,
log A = 6.2
A = Antilog 6.2
= 1.585 × 10⁶ s^-1
The values of rate constant k can be found from graph as follows:

We can also calculate the value of A from the following formula
log k = log A = \(\frac{E_{a}}{2.303 R T}\)

Question 23.
The rate constant for the decomposition of hydrocarbons is 2.418 × 10^-5 s^-1 at 546 K. If the energy of activation is 179.9 kJ/mol, what will be the value of pre-exponential factor.
Solution:
Given, k = 2.418 × 10^-5s^-1, T = 546 K
E_a = 179.9 kJ mol^-1 = 179.9 × 10³ J mol^-1
According to the Arrhenius equation,
k = Ae^-Ea/RT
ln k = ln A – \(\frac{E_{a}}{R T}\)
log k = log A – \(\frac{E_{a}}{2.303 R T}\)
log A = log K + \(\frac{E_{a}}{2.303 R T}\)
= log(2.418 × 10¹⁵s^-1) + \(\frac{179.9 \times 10^{3} \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{2.303 \times 8.314 \mathrm{Jk}^{-1} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 546 \mathrm{~K}}\)
= (0.3835 – 5) +17.2082 = 12.5917
Therefore, A = antilog (12.5917) = 3.9 × 10¹²s^-1

Question 24.
Consider a certain reaction A → Products with k = 2.0 × 10^-2s^-1 Calculate the concentration of A remaining after 100 s if the initial concentration of A is 1.0 mol L^-1.
Solution:
Given, k = 2.0 x 10^-2s^-1, t = 100 s, [A]₀ = 1.0 mol L^-1
Since, the unit of k is s^-1, the given reaction is a first order reaction.

Question 25.
Sucrose decomposes in acid solution into glucose and fructose according to the first order rate law, with t_1/2 =3.00 hours. What fraction of sample of sucrose remains after 8 hours?
Solution:
For a first order reaction,

= 0.158 M
Hence, the fraction of sample of sucrose that remains after 8 hours is 0.158 M.

Question 26.
The decomposition of hydrocarbon follows the equation k = (45 × 10¹¹ s¹)e^-28000k/T
Calculate E_a.
Solution:
The given equation is
k = (45 × 10¹¹ s¹)e^-28000k/T …(i)
Arrhenius equation is given by,
k = Ae^E_a/RT …(ii)
From equation (i) and (ii), we get
\(\frac{E_{a}}{R T}\) = \(\frac{28000 \mathrm{~K}}{T}\)
⇒ E_a = R × 28000 K
= 8.314 J K^-1 mol^-1 × 28000 K
= 232792 J mol^-1
= 232.792 kJ mol^-1

Question 27.
The rate constant for the first order decomposition of H₂O₂ is given by the following equation :
log k = 14.34 – 1.25 × 10⁴ K/T
Calculate E_a for this reaction and at what temperature will its half-period be 256 minutes?
Solution:
Arrhenius equation is given by,
k = Ae^-E_a/RT
⇒ log k = log A – \(\frac{E_{a}}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}\) …(i)
log k = 14.34 – 1.25 × 10⁴ K/T …(ii)
From equation (i) and (ii), we get
\(\frac{E_{a}}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}\) = \(\frac{1.25 \times 10^{4} \mathrm{~K}}{T}\)
⇒ E_a = 1.25 × 10⁴K × 2.303 × R
= 1.25 × 10⁴K × 2.303 × 8.314 J K^-1 mol^-1
= 239339.3 J mol^-1
= 239.34 kJ mol^-1
Also, when t_1/2 = 256 minutes,
For first order reaction
k = \(\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}}\)
= \(\frac{0.693}{256}\)
= 2.707 × 10^-13 min^-1
= 4.51 × 10^-5 s^-1
According to Arrhenius theory,
log k = 14.34 – 1.25 × 10^,4K/T

Question 28.
The decomposition of A into product has value of & as 45 × 10³ s^-1 at 10°C and energy of activation 60 kJ mol^-1. At what temperature would k be 1.5 × 10⁴ s^-1.
Solution:
From Arrhenius equation, we get
\(\log \frac{k_{2}}{k_{1}}\) = \(\frac{E_{a}}{2.303 \mathrm{R}}\left(\frac{T_{2}-T_{1}}{T_{1} T_{2}}\right)\)
Also, k₁ = 4.5 × 10³ s^-1
T₁ = 273 + 10 = 283k
k₂ = 1.5 × 10⁴ s^-1
E_a = 60 kJmol^-1 = 6.0 × 10⁴ Jmol^-1

⇒ 0.0472T₂ = T₂ – 283
⇒ 0.9528T₂ = 283
⇒ T₂ = 297.019 K
= 297K = (297 – 273)⁰C
= 24⁰C
Hence, k would be 1.5 × 10⁴ s^-1 at 24⁰C.

Question 29.
The time required for 10% completion of a first order reaction at 298 K is equal to that required for its 25% completion at 308 K. If the value of A is 4 × 10¹⁰ s^-1. Calculate k at 318 K and E_a.
Solution:
For a first order reaction,

To calculate k at 318 K,
It is given that, A = 4 × 10¹⁰ s^-1, T = 318 K
Again, from Arrhenius equation, we get
log k = log A – \(\frac{E_{a}}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}\)
= log (4 × 10¹⁰) – \(\frac{76.64 \times 10^{3}}{2.303 \times 8.314 \times 318}\)
= (0.6021 + 10) – 12.5870 = -1.9849 k
k = Antilog (-1.9849)
= Antilog (2.0151) = 1.035 × 10^-2s^-1
E_a = 76.640 kJ mol^-1
E_a = 76.640 kJmol^-1
k = 1.035 × 10^-2s^-1

Question 30.
The rate of a reaction quadruples when the temperature changes from 293 K to 313 K. Calculate the energy of activation of the reaction assuming that it does not change with temperature.
Solution:
Given, k₂ = 4k₁, T₁ = 293 K, T₂ = 313 K
From Arrhenius equation, we get

Hence, the required energy of activation is 52.86 kJ mol^-1

Chemistry Guide for Class 12 PSEB Chemical Kinetics Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
For the reaction R → P, the concentration of a reactant changes from 0.03 M to 0.02 M in 25 minutes. Calculate the average rate of reaction using units of time both in minutes and seconds.
Solution:

Question 2.
In a reaction, 2A → Products, the concentration of A decreases from 0.5 mol L^-1 to 0.4 mol L^-1 in 10 minutes. Calculate the rate during this interval?
Solution:
Rate of reaction = Rate of disappearance of A = – \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{\Delta[A]}{\Delta t}\)
= – \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{[A]_{2}-[A]_{1}}{t_{2}-t_{1}}\)
= – \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{(0.4-0.5) \mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1}}{10 \mathrm{~min}}\)
= – \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{-0.1}{10}\)
= 0.005 mol L^-1 min^-1
= 5 × 10^-3 M min^-1

Question 3.
For a reaction, A + B → Product; the rate law is given by,
r = k [A]^1/2 [B]². What is the order of the reaction?
Solution:
The order of the reaction = \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 2
= 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) = 2.5

Question 4.
The conversion of molecules X to Y follows second order kinetics. If concentration of X is increased to three times how will it affect the rate of formation of Y? ‘
Solution:
The reaction X → Y follows second order kinetics.
Therefore, the rate equation for this reaction will be:
Rate (r) = k[X]² = k × X² …………. (i)
If the concentration of X is increased to three times, then
Rate (r’) = fc(3X)² = k × 9X² ………….. (ii)
Dividing eq. (ii) by eq. (i)
\(\frac{r^{\prime}}{r}=\frac{k \times 9 X^{2}}{k \times X^{2}}\) = 9
It means that the rate of formation of Y will increase by nine times.

Question 5.
A first order reaction has a rate constant 1.15 × 10^-3s^-1. How long will 5 g of this reactant take to reduce to 3 g?
Solution:
Initial amount [R]₀ = 5 g
Final amount [R] = 3 g
Rate constant (k) = 1.15 × 10^-3s^-1
We know that for a 1^st order reaction,

= 444.38 s
= 444 s

Question 6.
Time required to decompose SO₂Cl₂ to half of its initial amount is 60 minutes. If the decomposition is a first order reaction, calculate the rate constant of the reaction.
Solution:
We know that for a 1^st order reaction,
t_1/2 = \(\frac{0.693}{k}\)
> k = \(\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}}\)
= \(\frac{0.693}{60 \mathrm{~min}}\) = \(\frac{0.693}{(60 \times 60) \mathrm{s}}\)
or k = 1.925 × 10^-4 s^-1]

Question 7.
What will be the effect of temperature on rate constant?
Answer:
The rate constant of a reaction is nearly doubled with a 10° rise in temperature. However, the exact dependence of the rate of a chemical reaction on temperature is given by Arrhenius equation,
k = Ae^-Ea/RT
Where, A is the Arrhenius factor or the frequency factor, T is the temperature, R is the gas constant, E_a is the activation energy.

Question 8.
The rate of the chemical reaction doubles for an increase of 10 K in absolute temperature from 298 K. Calculate E_a.
Solution:
Given, T₁ = 298 K
∴ T₂ = (298 + 10)K = 308K
We also know that the rate of the reaction doubles when temperature is increased by 10°.
Therefore, let us take the value of k₁ = k and that of k₂ = 2k
Also, R =8.314 JK^-1 mol^-1
Now, substituting these values in the equation:

Question 9.
The activation energy for the reaction
2HI (g) → H₂ + I₂(g)
is 209.5 kJ mol^-1 at 58IK. Calculate the fraction of molecules of reactants having energy equal to or greater than activation energy?
Solution:
Fraction of molecules of reactants (x) having energy equal to or greater than activation energy may be calculated as follows
or log x = \(\frac{-E_{a}}{R T}\) or log x = –\(\frac{E_{a}}{2.303 R T}\)
or log x = – \(\frac{209.5 \times 10^{3}}{2.303 \times 8.314 \times 581}\)
= -18.8323
x = Antilog (-18.8323) = Antilog (\(\overline{19}\).1677)
= 1.471 × 10^-19
Hence, fraction of molecules of reactants having energy equal to or greater than activation energy = 1.471 × 10^-19

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physics Book Solutions Chapter 7 Alternating Current Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physics Chapter 7 Alternating Current

PSEB 12th Class Physics Guide Alternating Current Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A 100 Ω resistor is connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz ac supply.
(a) What is the rms value of current in the circuit?
(b) What is the net power consumed over a full cycle?
Answer:
The given voltage of 220 V is the rms or effective voltage.
Given V_rms = 220 V, v = 50 Hz, R = 100 Ω
(a) RMS value of current,
I_rms = \(\frac{V_{r m s}}{R}\) = \(\frac{220}{100}\) = 2.2 A
Net power consumed, P = I²_rmsR
= (2.20)² × 100 = 484 W

Question 2.
(a) The peak voltage of an ac supply is 300 V. What is the rms voltage?
(b) The rms value of current in an ac circuit is 10 A. What is the peak current?
Answer:
(a) Given, V₀ = 300 V
V_rms = \(\frac{V_{0}}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{300}{\sqrt{2}}\) = 150√2 ≈ 212 V

(b) Given, I_rms = 10 A
I₀ = I_rms √2 = 10 × 1.41 = 14.1 A

Question 3.
A 44 mH inductor is connected to 220 V, 50 Hz ac supply. Determine the rms value of the current in the circuit.
Answer:
Inductance of inductor, L = 44 mH = 44 × 10^-3 H
Supply voltage, V = 220 V
Frequency, v = 50 Hz
Angular frequency, ω = 2 πv
Inductive reactance, X_L = ωL = 2πvL × 2π × 50 × 44 × 10^-3Ω
rms value of current is given as
I = \(\frac{V}{X_{L}}\) = \(\frac{220}{2 \pi \times 50 \times 44 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 15.92 A
Hence, the rms value of current in the circuit is 15.92 A.

Question 4.
A 60 μF capacitor is connected to a 110 V, 60 Hz ac supply. Determine the rms value of the current in the circuit.
Answer:
Capacitance of capacitor, C = 60μF = 60 × 10^-6F
Supply voltage, V = 110 V
Frequency, v = 60 Hz
Angular frequency, ω = 2 πv
Capacitive reactance,
X_C = \(\frac{1}{\omega C}\) = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi v C}\) = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi \times 60 \times 60 \times 10^{-6}}\)Ω
rms value of current is given as
I = \(\frac{V}{X_{C}}\) = \(\frac{110}{\frac{1}{2 \pi \times 60 \times 60 \times 10^{-6}}}\)
= 110 × 2 × 3.14 × 3600 × 10^-6
= 2.49 A
Hence, the rms value of current in the circuit is 2.49 A.

Question 5.
In Exercises 7.3 and 7.4, what is the net power absorbed by each circuit over a complete cycle. Explain your answer.
Answer:
In the inductive circuit,
rms value of current, I = 15.92 A
rms value of voltage, V = 220 V
Hence, the net power absorbed by the circuit, can be obtained by the relation,
P = VIcosΦ
where,
Φ = Phase difference between V and I.
For a pure inductive circuit, the phase difference between alternating voltage and current is 90°i. e., Φ = 90°
Hence, P = 0 i. e., the net power is zero.

In the capacitive circuit,
rms value of current, I = 2.49 A
rms value of voltage, V = 110 V
Hence, the net power absorbed by the circuit, can be obtained as
P = VIcosΦ
For a pure capacitive circuit, the phase difference between alternating voltage and current is 90°i. e., Φ = 90 °
Hence, P = 0 i. e., the net power is zero.

Question 6.
Obtain the resonant frequency ω_r of a series LCR circuit with L = 2.0 H, C = 32 μF and R = 10 Ω. What is the Q-value of this circuit?
Answer:
Resonant frequency,
ω_r = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2.0 \times 32 \times 10^{-6}}}\)
= \(\frac{1}{8}\) × 10³ = 125 rads^-1
Q = \(\frac{\omega_{r} L}{R}\) = \(\frac{125 \times 2.0}{10}\) = 25

Question 7.
A charged 30 μF capacitor is connected to a 27 mH inductor.
What is the angular frequency of free oscillations of the circuit?
Answer:
Capacitance of the capacitor, C = 30 μF = 30 × 10^-6 F,
Inductance of the inductor, L = 27 mH = 27 × 10^-3H
Angular frequency is given as
ω_r = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\)
= \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{27 \times 10^{-3} \times 30 \times 10^{-6}}}\)
= \(\frac{1}{9 \times 10^{-4}}=\frac{10^{4}}{9}\)
= 1.11 × 10³ rad/s
Hence, the angular frequency of free oscillations of the circuit is 1.11 × 10³ rad/s.

Question 8.
Suppose the initial charge on the capacitor in Exercise 7.7 is 6 mC. What is the total energy stored in the circuit initially? What is the total energy at later time?
Answer:
Capacitance of the capacitor, C = 30 μF = 30 × 10^-6F
Inductance of the inductor, L = 27 mH = 27 × 10^-3 H
Charge on the capacitor, Q = 6 mC = 6 × 10^-3 C
Total energy stored in the capacitor can be calculated as
E = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^{2}}{C}\) = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{\left(6 \times 10^{-3}\right)^{2}}{\left(30 \times 10^{-6}\right)}\)
= \(\frac{36 \times 10^{-6}}{2\left(30 \times 10^{-6}\right)}\)
= \(\frac{6}{10}\) = 0.6 J
Total energy at a later time will remain the same because energy is shared between the capacitor and the inductor.

Question 9.
A series LCR circuit with R = 20 Ω, L = 1.5 H and C = 35 μF is connected to a variable frequency 200 V ac supply. When the frequency of the supply equals the natural frequency of the circuit, what is the average power transferred to the circuit in one complete cycle?
Answer:
When frequency of supply is equal to natural frequency of circuit, then resonance is obtained. At resonance X_C = X_L
⇒ Impedance, Z = \(\sqrt{R^{2}+\left(X_{C}-X_{L}\right)^{2}}\)
= R = 20Ω
Current in circuit,
I_rms = \(\frac{V_{r m s}}{R}\) = \(\frac{200}{20}\) = 10A
Power factor
cosΦ = \(\frac{R}{Z}=\frac{R}{R}\) = 1
∴ Average power p_av = V_rms I_rms cosΦ = V_rms I_rms
= 20 × 10 = 2000 W = 2 kW

Question 10.
A radio can tune over the frequency range of a portion of MW broadcast band : (800 kHz to 1200 kHz). If its LC circuit has an effective inductance of 200 μH, what must be the range of its variable capacitor?
[Hint: For timing, the natural frequency i. e., the frequency of free oscillations of the LC circuit should be equal to the frequency of the radiowave.]
Answer:
The range of frequency (v) of the radio is 800 kHz to 1200 kHz
Lower tuning frequency, v₁ = 800 kHz = 800 × 10³ Hz
Upper tuning frequency, v₂ = 1200 kHz = 1200 × 10⁶ Hz
Effective inductance of circuit, L = 200 μH = 200 × 10^-6 H
Capacitance of variable capacitor for v₁ is given as
C₁ = \(\frac{1}{\omega_{1}^{2} L}\)
where, ω₁ = Angular frequency for capacitor C₁
= 2 πv₁
= 2 π × 800 × 10³ rad/s
∴ C₁ = \(\frac{1}{\left(2 \pi \times 800 \times 10^{3}\right)^{2} \times 200 \times 10^{-6}}\)
= 197.8 × 10^-12F
= 197.8 pF
Capacitance of variable capacitor for v₂ is given as
C₂ = \(\frac{1}{\omega_{2}^{2} L}\)
where,
ω₂ = Angular frequency for capacitor C₂
= 2πv₂
= 2 π × 1200 × 10³ rad/s
∴ C ₂ = \(\frac{1}{\left(2 \pi \times 1200 \times 10^{3}\right)^{2} \times 200 \times 10^{-6}}\)
= 87.95 × 10^-12 F = 87.95 pF
Hence, the range of the variable capacitor is from 87.95 pF to 197.8 pF.

Question 11.
Figure 7.21 shows a series LCR circuit connected to a variable frequency 230 V source. Z, = 5.0H, C = 80 μF, R = 40Ω.

(a) Determine the source frequency which drives the circuit in resonance.
(b) Obtain the impedance of the circuit and the amplitude of current at the resonating frequency.
(c) Determine the rms potential drops across the three elements of the circuit. Show that the potential drop across the LC combination is zero at the resonating frequency.
Answer:
Given, the rms value of voltage V_rms = 230 V
Inductance L = 5H
Capacitance C = 80 μF = 80 × 10^-6 F
Resistance R = 40 Ω

(a) For resonance frequency of circuit
ω_r = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{5 \times 80 \times 10^{-6}}}\) = 50 rad/s
Source frequency at resonance, then
v₀ = \(\frac{\omega_{0}}{2 \pi}\) = \(\frac{50}{2 \times 3.14}\) = 7.76 Hz

(b) At the resonant frequency, X_L = X_C
So, impedance of the circuit Z = R
∴ Impedance Z = 40 Ω
The rms value of current in the circuit
I_rms = \(\frac{V_{r m s}}{Z}\) = \(\frac{230}{40}\) = 5.75 A
Amplitude of current, I₀ = I_rms √2
= 5.75 × √2 = 8.13 A

(c) The rms potential drop across I,
V_L = I_rms × X_L = I_rms × ω_rL
= 5.75 × 50 × 5 = 1437.5V
The rms potential drop across R
V_R = I_rms R = 5.75 × 40 = 230 V
The rms potential drop across C,
V_C = I_rms × X_C = I_rms × \(\frac{1}{\omega_{r} C}\)
= 5.75 × \(\frac{1}{50 \times 80 \times 10^{-6}}\)
= 1437.5V
Potential drop across LC combinations
= I_rms(X_L – X_C)
= I_rms (X_L – X_L) = 0
(∵ X_L = X_C in resonance)

Question 12.
An LC circuit contains a 20 mH inductor and a 50 μF capacitor with an initial charge of 10 mC. The resistance of the circuit is negligible. Let the instant the circuit is closed be t = 0.
(a) What is the total energy stored initially? Is it conserved during LC oscillations?
(b) What is the natural frequency of the circuit?
(c) At what time is the energy stored (i) completely electrical (Lestored in the capacitor)? (ii) completely magnetic (i.e., stored in the inductor)?
(d) At what times is the total energy shared equally between the inductor and the capacitor?
(e) If a resistor is inserted in the circuit, how much energy is eventually dissipated as heat?
Answer:
Inductance of the inductor, L = 20 mH = 20 × 10^-3H
Capacitance of the capacitor, C = 50 μF = 50 × 10^-6 F
Initial charge on the capacitor, Q = 10 mC = 10 × 10^-3C

(a) Total energy stored initially in the circuit is given as
E = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{Q^{2}}{C}\)
= \(\frac{\left(10 \times 10^{-3}\right)^{2}}{2 \times 50 \times 10^{-6}}=\frac{10^{-4}}{10^{-4}}\) = 1J
Hence, the total energy stored in the LC circuit will be conserved because there is no resistor connected in the circuit.

(b) Natural frequency of the circuit is given by the relation,
v = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{L C}}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2 \pi \sqrt{20 \times 10^{-3} \times 50 \times 10^{-6}}}\)
= \(\frac{10^{3}}{2 \pi}\) = 159.24 Hz
Natural angular frequency,
ω_c = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{20 \times 10^{-3} \times 50 \times 10^{-6}}}\)
= \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{10^{-6}}}\) = 10³ rad/s
Hence, the natural frequency of the circuit is 10 rad/s.

(c) (i) For time period (T = \(\frac{1}{v}\) = \(\frac{1}{159.24}\) = 6.28 ms), total charge on the
capacitor at time t,
Q’ = Q cos\(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\)t
For energy stored is electrical, we can write Q’ = Q
Hence, it can be inferred that the energy stored in the capacitor is completely electrical at time, t = 0, \(\frac{T}{2}\), T, \(\frac{3 T}{2}\),…

(ii) Magnetic energy is the maximum when electrical energy, Q’ is equal to 0.
Hence, it can be inferred that the energy stored in the capacitor is
completely magnetic at time, t = \(\frac{T}{4}\), \(\frac{3 T}{4}\), \(\frac{5 T}{4}\),….

(d) Q’ = Charge on the capacitor when total energy is equally shared between the capacitor and the inductor at time t.
When total energy is equally shared between the inductor and capacitor,
the energy stored in the capacitor = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (maximum energy)

Hence, total energy is equally shared between the inductor and the capacitor at time,
t = \(\frac{T}{8}\), \(\frac{3 T}{8}\),\(\frac{5 T}{8}\)

(e) If a resistor is inserted in the circuit, then total initial energy is dissipated as heat energy in the circuit. The resistance damps out the LC oscillation.

Question 13.
A coil of inductance 0.50 H and resistance 100 Ω is connected to a 240 V, 50 Hz ac supply.
(a) What is the maximum current in the coil?
(b) What is the time lag between the voltage maximum and the current maximum?
Answer:
Given, L = 0.50 H ,R = 100 Ω, V = 240 V, v = 50 Hz
(a) Maximum (or peak) voltage V₀ = V – √2
Maximum current, I₀ = \(\frac{V_{0}}{Z}\)
Inductive reactance, X_L = ω_L = 2πvL
= 2 × 3.14 × 50 × 0.50
= 157 Ω.
Z = \(\sqrt{R^{2}+X_{L}^{2}}\)
= \(\sqrt{(100)^{2}+(157)^{2}}\) = 186 Ω

Question 14.
Obtain the answers (a) to (b) in Exercise 7.13 if the circuit is connected to a high frequency supply (240 V, 10 kHz). Hence, explain the statement that at very high frequency, an inductor in a circuit nearly amounts to an open circuit. How does an inductor behave in a dc circuit after the steady state?
Answer:
Inductance of the inductor, L = 0.5 Hz
Resistance of the resistor, R = 100 Ω
Potential of the supply voltage, V = 240 V
Frequency of the supply, v = 10 kHz = 10⁴ Hz
Angular frequency, ω = 2πv = 2 π × 10⁴ rad/s

(a) Peak voltage, V₀ = √2 × V = 240√2 V
Maximum current, I₀ = \(\frac{V_{0}}{\sqrt{R^{2}+\omega^{2} L^{2}}}\)
= \(\frac{240 \sqrt{2}}{\sqrt{(100)^{2}+\left(2 \pi \times 10^{4}\right)^{2} \times(0.50)^{2}}}\)
= 1.1 × 10^-2 A

(b) For phase difference, Φ, we have the relation
tanΦ = \(\frac{\omega L}{R}\) = \(\frac{2 \pi \times 10^{4} \times 0.5}{100}\) = 100π
Φ = 89.82° = \(\frac{89.82 \pi}{180}\) rad
ωt = \(\frac{89.82 \pi}{180}\)
t = \(\frac{89.82 \pi}{180 \times 2 \pi \times 10^{4}}\) = 25 μs

It can be observed that I₀ is very small in this case. Hence, at high frequencies, the inductor amounts to an open circuit.
In a dc circuit, after a steady state is achieved, ω = 0. Hence, inductor L behaves like a pure conducting object.

Question 15.
A 100 μF capacitor in series with a 40 Ω resistance is connected to a 110 V, 60 Hz supply.
(a) What is the maximum current in the circuit?
(b) What is the time lag between the current maximum and the voltage maximum?
Answer:
Capacitance of the capacitor, C = 100 μF = 100 × 10^-6 F = 10^-4 F
Resistance of the resistor, R = 40 Ω
Supply voltage, V = 110 V
Frequency of oscillations, v = 60 Hz
Angular frequency, co = 2πv = 2π × 60 rad/s = 120 π rad/s
For a RC circuit, we have the relation for impedance as
Z = \(\sqrt{R^{2}+\frac{1}{\omega^{2} C^{2}}}\)
peak voltage V₀ = V√2 = 110√2

(b) In an RC circuit, the voltage lags behind the current by a phase angle of Φ. This angle is given by the relation

= 1.55 × 10^-3 s
= 1.55 ms
Hence, the time lag between maximum current and maximum voltage is 1.55 ms.

Question 16.
Obtain the answers to (a) and (b) in Exercise 7.15 if the circuit is connected to a 110 V, 12 kHz supply? Hence, explain the statement that a capacitor is a conductor at very high frequencies. Compare this behaviour with that of a capacitor in a dc circuit after the steady state.
Answer:
Capacitance of the capacitor, C = 100 μF = 100 × 10^-6 F
Resistance of the resistor, R = 40 Ω
Supply voltage, V = 110 V
Frequency of the supply, v = 12 kHz = 12 × 10³ Hz
Angular frequency, ω = 2πv = 2 × π × 12 × 10³
= 24 π × 10³ rad/s
Peak voltage, V₀ = V√2 = 110 √2V

= 0.04 μs
Hence, Φ tends to become zero at high frequencies. At a high frequency, capacitor C acts as a conductor.
In a dc circuit, after the steady state is achieved, ω = 0. Hence, capacitor C acts an open circuit.

Question 17.
Keeping the source frequency equal to the resonating frequency of the series LCR circuit, if the three elements, L, C and R are arranged in parallel, show that the total current in the parallel LCR circuit is minimum at this frequency. Obtain the current rms value in each branch of the circuit for the elements and source specified in Exercise 7.11 for this frequency.
Answer:
Here, L = 5.0 H
C = 80 μF = 80 × 10^-6 F
R = 40Ω
The effective impedance of the parallel LCR is given by

Question 18.
A circuit containing a 80 mH inductor and a 60 µF capacitor in series is connected to a 230 V, 50 Hz supply. The resistance of the circuit is negligible.
(a) Obtain the current amplitude and rms values.
(b) Obtain the rms values of potential drops across each element.
(c) What is the average power transferred to the inductor?
(d) What is the average power transferred to the capacitor?
(e) What is the total average power absorbed by the circuit?
[‘Average’ implies ‘averaged over one cycle’.]
Answer:
Given,
V = 230 V, v = 50 Hz, L = 80 mH = 80 × 10^-3 H,
C = 60µF = 60 × 10^-6 F

(a) Inductive reactance X_L = ωL = 2πvL
= 2 × 3.14 × 50 × 80 × 10^-3
= 25.1 Ω

(b) RMS value of potential drops across L and C are
V_L = X_L I_rms = 25.1 × 8.23 = 207 V
V_C = X_C I_rms = 53.1 × 8.23 = 437 V
Net voltage = V_C – V_L = 230 V

(c) The voltage across L leads the current by angle \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) , therefore, average
power
P_av V_rms I_rms cos \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) = 0 (zero)

(d) The voltage across C lags behind the current by angle \(\frac{\pi}{2}\),
∴ p_av = V_rms I_rms cos \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) = 0

(e) As circuit contains pure I and pure C, average power consumed by LC circuit is zero.

Question 19.
Suppose the circuit in Exercise 7.18 has a resistance of 15 Ω. Obtain the average power transferred to each element of the circuit, and the total power absorbed.
Answer:
Here, R – 15Ω, L = 80 mH = 80 × 10^-3 H
C = 60 μF = 60 × 10^-6 F.
E_r.m.s. = 230 V
v = 50 Hz
> ω = 2πv = 2π × 50 =100 π
Z = impedance of LCR circuit
= \(\sqrt{R^{2}+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^{2}}\)

= 7.258 = 7.26 A
∴ Average power consumed by R or transferred to R is given by
(P_av)R = I²_r.m.s..R = (7.26)² × 15 = 790.614 W
= 791 W.
Also (P_av)_L and (P_av)_C be the average power transferred to I and C respectively.
(P_av)_L = E_r.m.s. . I_r.m.s. cosΦ
Here e.m.f. leads current by \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
∴ (P_av)_L= E_r.m.s. . I_r.m.s. cos \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
= 0
and (P_av )_C = = E_r.m.s. . I_r.m.s. cosΦ
= 0
( ∵ Φ = \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) and cos \(\frac{\pi}{2}\) = 0

If Pav be the total power absorbed in the circuit, then
P_av = (P_av)_L + (P_av )_C + (P_av )_R
= 0 + 0 + 791
= 791 W

Question 20.
A series LCR circuit with L = 0.12 H, C = 480 nF, R = 23 Ω is connected to a 230 V variable frequency supply.
(a) What is the source frequency for which current amplitude is maximum? Obtain this maximum value.
(b) What is the source frequency for which average power absorbed by the circuit is maximum? Obtain the value of this maximum power.
(c) For which frequencies of the source is the power transferred to the circuit half the power at resonant frequency? What is the current amplitude at these frequencies?
(d) What is the Q-factor of the given circuit?
Answer:
Inductance, L = 0.12 H
Capacitance, C = 480 nF = 480 × 10^-9 F
Resistance, R = 23 Ω
Supply voltage, V = 230 V
Peak voltage is given as V₀ = √2V
V₀ = √2 × 230 = 325.22 V

(a) Current flowing in the circuit is given by the relation,
I₀ = \(\frac{V_{0}}{\sqrt{R^{2}+\left(\omega L-\frac{1}{\omega C}\right)^{2}}}\)
where, I₀ = maximum at resonance
At resonance, we have
ω_RL – \(\frac{1}{\omega_{R} C}[latex] = 0
where, ω_R = Resonance angular frequency
∴ ω_R = [latex]\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\)
= \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{0.12 \times 480 \times 10^{-9}}}\)
= \(\frac{10^{5}}{\sqrt{12 \times 48}}=\frac{10^{5}}{24}\)
= 4166.67 rad/s
∴ Resonant frequency; v_R = \(\frac{\omega_{R}}{2 \pi}\) = \(\frac{4166.67}{2 \times 3.14}\) = 663.48 HZ
and, maximum current (I₀)_max = \(\frac{V_{0}}{R}\) = \(\frac{325.22}{23}\) 14.14 A

(b) Average power absorbed by the circuit is given as
P_av = \(\frac{1}{2}\)I₀²R

The average power is maximum at ω = ω₀ at which I₀ = (I₀)_max
∴ (p_av )_max = \(\frac{1}{2}\)(I₀)²_maxR
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (14.14)² × 23 = 2299.3 W
= 2300 W

(c) The power transferred to the circuit is half the power at resonant frequency.
Frequencies at which power transferred is half, ω = ω_R ± Δ ω
= 2π (v_R ± Δv)
where, Δω = \(\frac{R}{2 L}\)
= \(\frac{23}{2 \times 0.12}\) = 95.83 rad/s
Hence, change in frequency, Δ v = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi}\) Δω = \(\frac{95.83}{2 \pi}\) = 15.26 Hz
Thus power absorbed is half the peak power at
v_R + Δv = 663.48 + 15.26 = 678.74 Hz
and, v_R ΔV = 663.48 – 15.26 = 648.22 Hz
Hence, at 648.22 Hz and 678.74 Hz frequencies, the power transferred is half.
At these frequencies, current amplitude can be given as
I’ = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) × (I₀)max = \(\frac{14.14}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{14.14}{1.414}\) = 10 A

(d) Q-factor of the given circuit can be obtained using the relation,
Q = \(\frac{\omega_{R} L}{R}\) = \(\frac{4166.67 \times 0.12}{23}\) = 21.74
Hence, the Q-factor of the given circuit is 21.74.

Question 21.
Obtain the resonant frequency and Q-factor of a series LCR circuit with L = 3.0 H, C = 27 μF and R = 7.4 Ω. It is desired to improve the sharpness of the resonance of the circuit by reducing its ‘full width at half maximum’ by a factor of 2. Suggest a suitable way.
Answer:
Inductance, L = 3.0 H
Capacitance, C = 27 μF = 27 × 10^-6F
Resistance, R = 7.4 Ω
At resonance, resonant frequency of the source for the given LCR series circuit is given as
ω_r = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{L C}}\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3 \times 27 \times 10^{-6}}}\)
\(\frac{10^{3}}{9}\) = 111.11 rad s^-1
Q-factor of the series
Q = \(\frac{\omega_{r} L}{R}\) = \(\frac{111.11 \times 3}{7.4}\) = 45.0446
To improve the sharpness of the resonance by reducing its ‘full width at half maximum’ by a factor of 2 without changing cor, we need to reduce R to half i. e., Resistance = \(\frac{R}{2}=\frac{7.4}{2}\) = 3.7 Ω.

Question 22.
Answer the following questions :
(a) In any ac circuit, is the applied instantaneous voltage equal to the algebraic sum of the instantaneous voltages across the series elements of the circuit? Is the same true for rms voltage?

(b) A capacitor is used in the primary circuit of an induction coil.

(c) An applied voltage signal consists of a superposition of a dc voltage and an ac voltage of high frequency. The circuit consists of an inductor and a capacitor in series. Show that the dc signal will appear across C and the ac signal across L.

(d) A choke coil in series with a lamp is connected to a dc line. The lamp is seen to shine brightly. Insertion of an iron core in the choke causes no change in the lamp’s brightness. Predict the corresponding observations if the connection is to an ac line.

(e) Why is choke coil needed in the use of fluorescent tubes with ac mains? Why can we not use an ordinary resistor instead of the choke coil?
Answer:
(a) Yes; the statement is not true for rms voltage.
It is true that in any ac circuit, the applied voltage is equal to the average sum of the instantaneous voltages across the series elements of the circuit. However, this is not true for rms voltage because voltages across different elements may not be in phase.

(b) High induced voltage is used to charge the capacitor.
A capacitor is used in the primary circuit of an induction coil. This is because when the circuit is broken, a high induced voltage is used to charge the capacitor to avoid sparks.

(c) The dc signal will appear across capacitor C because for dc signals, the impedance of an inductor (L) is negligible while the impedance of a capacitor (C) is very high (almost infinite). Hence, a dc signal appears across C. For an ac signal of high frequency, the impedance of L is high and that of C is very low. Hence, an ac signal of high frequency appears across L.

(d) If an iron core is inserted in the choke coil (which is in series with a lamp connected to the ac line), then the lamp will glow dimly. This is because the choke coil and the iron core increase the impedance of the circuit.

(e) A choke coil is needed in the use of fluorescent tubes with ac mains because it reduces the voltage across the tube without wasting much power. An ordinary resistor cannot be used instead of a choke coil for this purpose because it wastes power in the form of heat.

Question 23.
A power transmission line feeds input power at 2300 V to a stepdown transformer with its primary windings having 4000 turns. What should be the number of turns in the secondary in order to get output power at 230 V?
Answer:
Input voltage, V₁ = 2300 V
Number of turns in primary coil, n₁ = 4000
Output voltage, V₂ = 230 V
Number of turns in secondary coil = n₂
Voltage is related to the number of turns as
\(\frac{V_{1}}{V_{2}}=\frac{n_{1}}{n_{2}}\)
\(\frac{2300}{230}=\frac{4000}{n_{2}}\)
n₂ = \(\frac{4000 \times 230}{2300}\) = 400
Hence, there are 400 turns in the second winding.

Question 24.
At a hydroelectric power plant, the water pressure head is at a height of 300 m and the water flow available is 100 m³s^-1 . If the turbine generator efficiency is 60%, estimate the electric power available from the plant (g = 9.8 ms^-2).
Answer:
Height of the water pressure head, h = 300 m
Volume of water flow per second, V = 100 m³/s
Efficiency of turbine generator, η = 60% = 0.6
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 m/ s²
Density of water, ρ = 10³ kg/m³
Electric power available from the plant = η × h ρ gV
= 0.6 × 300 × 10³ × 9.8 × 100
= 176.4 × 10⁶ W
= 176.4 MW

Question 25.
A small town with a demand of 800 kW of electric power at 220 V is situated 15 km away from an electric plant generating power at 440 V. The resistance of the two wire line carrying power is 0.5 Ω per km. The town gets power from the line through a 4000-220 V step-down transformer at a sub-station in the town.
(a) Estimate the line power loss in the form of heat.
(b) How much power must the plant supply, assuming there is negligible power loss due to leakage?
(c) Characterise the step up transformer at the plant.
Answer:
Total electric power required, P = 800 kW = 800 × 10³ W
Supply voltage, V = 220 V
Voltage at which electric plant is generating power, V’ = 440 V
Distance between the town and power generating station, d = 15 km
Resistance of the two wire lines carrying power = 0.5 Ω/km
Total resistance of the wires, R = (15 + 15)0.5 = 15Ω
A step-down transformer of rating 4000 – 220 V is used in the sub-station.
Input voltage, V₁ = 4000 V
Output voltage, V₂ = 220 V
rms current in the wire lines is given as
I = \(\frac{P}{V_{1}}\) = \(\frac{800 \times 10^{3}}{4000}\) = 200 A

(a) Line power loss = I²R = (200)² × 15 = 600 × 10³ W = 600 kW

(b) Assuming that the power loss is negligible due to the leakage of the current.
Total power supplied by the plant = 800 kW + 600 kW = 1400 kW

(c) Voltage drop in the power line = IR = 200 × 15 = 3000 V
Hence, total voltage transmitted from the plant = 3000 + 4000 = 7000 V Also, the power generated is 440 V.
Hence, the rating of the step-up transformer situated at the power plant is 440 V – 7000 V.

Question 26.
Do the same exercise as above with the replacement of the earlier transformer by a 40,000-220 V step-down transformer (Neglect, as before, leakage losses though this may not be a good assumption any longer because of the very high voltage transmission involved). Hence, explain why high voltage transmission is preffered?
Answer:
The rating of the step-down transformer is 40000 V – 220 V
Input voltage, V₁ = 40000 V
Output voltage, V₂ = 220 V
Total electric power required, P = 800 kW = 800 × 10³ W
Source potential, V = 220 V
Voltage at which the electric plant generates power, V’ = 440 V
Distance between the town and power generating station, d = 15 km
Resistance of the two wire lines carrying power = 0.5 Ω/km
Total resistance of the wire lines, R = (15 + 15)0.5 = 15 Ω
rms current in the wire line is given as
I = \(\frac{P}{V_{1}}\) = \(\frac{800 \times 10^{3}}{40000}\) = 20A

(a) Line power loss = I²R
= (20)² × 15 = 6000 W = 6 kW

(b) Assuming that the power loss is negligible due to the leakage of current.
Hence, total power supplied by the plant = 800 kW + 6 kW = 806 kW

(c) Voltage drop in the power line = 7R = 20 × 15 = 300 V
Hence, voltage that is transmitted by the power plant
= 300 + 40000 = 40300 V
The power is being generated in the plant at 440 V.
Hence, the rating of the step-up transformer needed at the plant is 440 V – 40300 V. ‘
Hence, power loss during transmission = \(\frac{600}{1400}\) x 100 = 42.8%
In the previous exercise, the power loss due to the same reason is
\(\frac{6}{800}\) × 100 = 0.744%
Since the power loss is less for a high voltage transmission, high voltage transmissions are preferred for this purpose.

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physics Book Solutions Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physics Chapter 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments

PSEB 12th Class Physics Guide Ray Optics and Optical Instruments Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A small candle, 2.5 cm in size is placed at 27 cm in front of a concave mirror of radius of curvature 36 cm. At what distance from the mirror should a screen be placed in order to obtain a sharp image? Describe the nature and size of the image. If the candle is moved closer to the mirror, how would the screen have to be moved?
Answer:
Size of the candle, h = 2.5 cm
Image size = h’
Object distance, u = -27 cm
Radius of curvature of the concave mirror, R = -36 cm
Focal length of the concave mirror, f = \(\frac{R}{2}=\frac{-36}{2}\) = -18 cm
Image distance = v

The image distance can be obtained using the mirror formula

The negative sign shows that the image is formed in front of the mirror i.e., on the side of the object itself. Thus the screen must be placed at a distance of 54 cm in front of the mirror.
The magnification of the image is given as

The height of the candle’s image is 5 cm. The negative sign indicates that the image is inverted and virtual.
If the candle is moved closer to the mirror, then the screen will have to be moved away from the mirror in order to obtain the image.

Question 2.
A 4.5 cm needle is placed 12 cm away from a convex mirror of focal length 15 cm. Give the location of the image and the magnification. Describe what happens as the needle is moved farther from the mirror.
Answer:
Given u = -12 cm, f = +15 cm. (convex mirror)

That is image is formed at a distance of 6.67 cm behind the mirror.
Magnification m = \(-\frac{v}{u}=-\frac{\frac{20}{3}}{-12} \) = \(\frac{5}{9}\)
Size of image I = mO = \(\frac{5}{9}\) x 4.5 = 2.5 cm
The image is erect, virtual and has a size 2.5 cm.

Its position is 6.67 cm behind the mirror when needle is moved farther, the image moves towards the focus and its size goes on decreasing.

Question 3.
A tank is filled with water to a height of 12.5 cm. The apparent depth of a needle lying at the bottom of the tank is measured by a microscope to be 9.4 cm. What is the refractive index of water? If water is replaced by a liquid of refractive index 1.63 up to the same height, by what distance would the microscope have to be moved to focus on the needle again?
Answer:
Case I:
When tank is filled with water Actual depth of the needle in water, h₁ = 12.5cm
Apparent depth of the needle in water, h₂ =9.4cm
Refractive index of water = μ
The value μ can be obtained as follows
μ = \(\frac{\text { Actual depth }}{\text { Apparent depth }}\)
= \(\frac{h_{1}}{h_{2}}=\frac{12.5}{9.4}\) ≈ 1.33
Hence, the refractive index of water is about 1.33

Case II: When tank is filled with liquid
Water is replaced by a liquid of refractive index, μ’ = 1.63
The actual depth of the needle remains the same, but its apparent depth changes.
Let y be the new apparent depth of the needle. Hence, we can write the relation
μ’ = \(\frac{h_{1}}{y}\)
y = \(\frac{h_{1}}{\mu^{\prime}}=\frac{12.5}{1.63}\) = 7.67 cm
Hence, the new apparent depth of the needle is 7.67cm. It is less than h2 Therefore, to focus the needle again, the microscope should be moved up. Distance by which the microscope should be moved up =9.4-7.67 = 1.73 cm.

Question 4.
Figures 9.34 (a) and (b) show refraction of a ray in air incident at 60° with the normal to a glass air and water-air interface, respectively. Predict the angle of refraction in glass when the angle of incidence in water is 45° with the normal to a water-glass interface [Fig. 9.34 (c)]

Answer:
As per the given figure, for the glass-air interface
Angle of incidence, i = 60°
Angle of refraction, r = 35°
The relative refractive index of glass with respect to air is given by Snell’s law as
^aμ_g = \( \frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\)
= \(\frac{\sin 60^{\circ}}{\sin 35^{\circ}}=\frac{0.8660}{0.5736}\) = 1.51 …………………….. (1)
As per the given figure, for the air-water interface
Angle of incidence, j = 600
Angle of refraction, r = 470
The relative refractive index of water with respect to air is given by Snell’s law as
^wμ_w = \( \frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\)
= \(\frac{\sin 60^{\circ}}{\sin 47^{\circ}}=\frac{0.8660}{0.7314}\) = 1.184 …………………………… (2)

Using equations (1) and (2), the relative refractive index of glass with respect to water can be obtained as
^wμ_g = \(\frac{a_{g}}{a_{w_{w}}}\)
= \( \frac{1.51}{1.184} \) = 1.275

The following figure shows the situation involving the glass-water interface

Angle of incidence, i = 45
Angle of reflection = r
From Snell’s law, r can be calculated as, \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) = ^wμ_g
\(\frac{\sin 45^{\circ}}{\sin r}\) = 1.275
sin r = \(\frac{\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}}{1.275}=\frac{0.707}{1.275}\) = 0.5546
r = sin^-1(0.5546) = 38.68°
Hence, the angle of refraction at the water-glass interface is 38.68°

Question 5.
A small bulb is placed at the bottom of a tank containirg water to a depth of 80 cm. What is the area of the surface of water through which light from the bulb can emerge out? Refractive index of water is 1.33 (Consider the bulb to be a point source.)
Answer:
Actual depth of the bulb in water, d₁ = 80 cm = 0.8 m
Refractive index of water, μ = 1.33
The given situation is shown in the following figure

where,
i = Angle of Incidence
r = Angle of Refraction = 90°
Since the bulb is a point source, the emergent light can be considered as a circle of radius,
R = \(\frac{A C}{2}\) = AO = OC
Using Snell’s law, we can write the relation for the refractive index of water as
μ = \(\frac{\sin r}{\sin i}\)
1.33 = \(\frac{\sin 90^{\circ}}{\sin i}\)
i = sin^-1\(\left(\frac{1}{1.33}\right)\) = 48.75°

Using the given figure, we have the relation
tan i = \(\frac{O C}{O B}=\frac{R}{d_{1}}\)
∴R = tan 48.75° x 0.8 = 0.91 m
∴ Area of the surface of water = πR²
= π(0.91)²
= 2.61 m²
Hence, the area of the surface of water through which the light from the bulb can emerge is approximately 2.61 m².

Question 6.
A prism is made of glass of unknown refractive index. A parallel beam of light is incident on a face of the prism. The angle of minimum deviation is measured to be 40°. What is the refractive index of the material of the prism? The refracting angle of the prism is 60°. If the prism is placed in water (refractive index 1.33), predict the new angle of minimum deviation of a parallel beam of light.
Answer:
Angle of minimum deviation, δ_m = 40 °
Refracting angle of the prism, A = 60°
Refractive index of water, μ = 1.33
Let μ’ be the refractive index of the material of the prism.
The angle of deviation and refracting angle of the prism are related to refractive index (μ’) as
μ’ = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+\delta_{m}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{A}{2}\right)} \)
= \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{60^{\circ}+40^{\circ}}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{60^{\circ}}{2}\right)}=\frac{\sin 50^{\circ}}{\sin 30^{\circ}}=\frac{0.766}{0.5}\)
= 1.532
Hence, the refractive index of the material of the prism is 1.532.
Since the prism is placed in water, let 8 ^ be the new angle of minimum deviation for the same prism.

The refractive index of glass with respect to water is given by the relation


Hence, the new minimum angle of deviation is 10.32°.

Question 7.
Double-convex lenses are to be manufactured from a glass of refractive index 1.55, with both faces of the same radius of curvature. What is the radius of curvature required if the focal length is to be 20 cm?
Answer:
Lens maker formula is
\(\frac{1}{f}=(n-1)\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\) …………………………………… (1)
If R is radius of curvature of double convex lens, then,

∴ R = 2(n-1)f
Here, n =1.55, f = +20 cm
∴ R = 2 (1.55 -1) x 20 = 22 cm

Question 8.
A beam of light converges at a point P. Now a lens is placed in the path of the convergent beam 12 cm from P. At what point does the beam converge if the lens is (a) a convex lens of focal length 20 cm, and (b) a concave lens of focal length 16 cm?
Answer:
In the given situation, the object is virtual and the image formed is real.
Object distance, u = +12cm
(a) Focal length of the convex lens, f = 20 cm
Image distance = v
According to the lens formula, we have the relation

∴ v = \(\frac{60}{8}\) = 7.5cm
Hence, the image is formed 7.5cm away from the lens, toward its right.

(b) Focal length of the concave lens, f = -16 cm
Image distance = v
According to the lens formula, we have the relation

∴ v = 48 cm
Hence, the image is formed 48 cm away from the lens, toward its right.

Question 9.
An object of size 3.0 cm is placed 14 cm in front of a concave lens of focal length 21 cm. Describe the image produced by the lens. What happens if the object is moved further away from the lens?
Answer:
Size of object O = 3.0 cm
u = -14 cm, f = -21 cm (concave lens)
∴ Formula \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\)
⇒ \(\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{f}+\frac{1}{u}\)
or \(\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{-21}+\frac{1}{-14}=-\frac{2+3}{42}\)
or v = \(-\frac{42}{5}\) = -8.4 cm
Size of image I = \(\frac{v}{u}\) O
= \(\frac{-8.4}{-14}\) x 3.0 cm = 1.8 cm

That is, image is formed at a distance of 8.4 cm in front of lens. The image is virtual, erect and of size 1.8 cm. As the object is moved farther from the lens, the image goes on shifting towards focus and its size goes on decreasing. The image is never formed beyond the focus of the concave lens.

Question 10.
What is the focal length of a convex lens of focal length 30 cm in contact with a concave lens of focal length 20 cm? Is the system
a converging or a diverging lens? Ignore thickness of the lenses.
Answer:
Given f₁ = +30 cm, f₂ = -20 cm
The focal length (F) of combination is given by
\(\frac{1}{F}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}+\frac{1}{f_{2}}\)
⇒ F = \(\frac{f_{1} f_{2}}{f_{1}+f_{2}}\)
= \(\frac{30 \times(-20)}{30-20}\) = -60 cm
That is, the focal length of combination is 60 cm and it acts like a diverging lens.

Question 11.
A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of focal length 2.0 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 6.25 cm separated by a distance of 15 cm. How far from the objective should an object be placed in order to obtain the final image at (a) the least distance of distinct vision (25cm), and (b) at infinity? What is the magnifying power of the microscope in each case?
Answer:
Focal length of the objective lens, f₀ = 2.0 cm
Focal length of the eyepiece, f_e = 6.25cm
Distance between the objective lens and the eyepiece, d = 15cm
(a) Least distance of distinct vision, d’ = 25cm
∴ Image distance for the eyepiece, v_e = -25cm
Object distance for the eyepiece = u_e
According to the lens formula, we have the relation
\(\frac{1}{v_{e}}-\frac{1}{u_{e}}=\frac{1}{f_{e}}\)
or \(\frac{1}{u_{e}}=\frac{1}{v_{e}}-\frac{1}{f_{e}}\)
= \(\frac{1}{-25}-\frac{1}{6.25}=\frac{-1-4}{25}=\frac{-5}{25}\)
∴ u_e = -5cm
Image distance for the objective lens, v₀ = d + ue =15-5 = 10 cm
Object distance for the objective lens = u₀
According to the lens formula, we have the relation
\(\frac{1}{v_{o}}-\frac{1}{u_{o}}=\frac{1}{f_{o}}\)
\(\frac{1}{u_{0}}=\frac{1}{v_{0}}-\frac{1}{f_{0}}=\frac{1}{10}-\frac{1}{2}=\frac{1-5}{10}=\frac{-4}{10}\)
∴ u₀=-2.5cm
Magnitude of the object distance, |u₀| = 2.5 cm
The magnifying power of a compound microscope is given by the relation
m = \(\frac{v_{o}}{\left|u_{o}\right|}\left(1+\frac{d^{\prime}}{f_{e}}\right)\)
= \(\frac{10}{2.5}\left(1+\frac{25}{6.25}\right)\) = 4(1+4) = 20
Hence, the magnifying power of the microscope is 20.

(b) The final image is formed at infinity.
∴ Image distance for the eyepiece, v_e = ∞
Object distance for the eyepiece = u_e
According to the lens formula, we have the relation
\(\frac{1}{v_{o}}-\frac{1}{u_{o}}=\frac{1}{f_{o}}\)
\(\frac{1}{u_{o}}=\frac{1}{v_{o}}-\frac{1}{f_{o}}=\frac{1}{8.75}-\frac{1}{2.0}=\frac{2-8.75}{17.5}\)
∴ u₀ = \(\frac{17.5}{6.75}\) = -2.59 cm
Magnitude of the object distance, |u₀| = 2.59 cm
The magnifying power of a compound microscope is given by the relation
m = \(\frac{v_{o}}{\left|u_{o}\right|}\left(1+\frac{d^{\prime}}{f_{e}}\right)\)
= \(\frac{8.75}{2.59} \times\left(1+\frac{25}{6.25}\right)\) = 13.51
Hence, the magnifying power of the microscope is 13.51.

Question 12.
A person with a normal near point (25cm) using a compound microscope with objective of focal length 8.0 mm and an eyepiece of focal length 2.5 cm can bring an object placed at 9.0 mm from the objective in sharp focus. What is the separation between the two lenses? Calculate the magnifying power of the microscope.
Answer:
Focal length of the objective lens, f₀= 8 mm = 0.8cm
Focal length of the eyepiece, f_e = 2.5 cm
Object distance for the objective lens, u₀ = -9.0 mm = -0.9 cm
Least distance of distant vision, d = 25 cm
Image distance for the eyepiece, v_e = -d = -25 cm
Object distance for the eyepiece = u_e

Using the lens formula, we can obtain the value of u_e as

∴ u_e = \(-\frac{25}{11}\) = -2.27 cm
We can also obtain the value of the image distance for the objective lens (v₀) using the lens formula.

∴ v₀ = 7.2 cm
The distance between the objective lens and the eyepiece = |u_e|+v₀
= 2.27+ 7.2 = 9.47cm
The magnifying power of the microscope is calculated as \(\frac{v_{o}}{\left|u_{o}\right|}\left(1+\frac{d}{f_{e}}\right)\)
= \(\frac{7.2}{0.9}\left(1+\frac{25}{2.5}\right)\)
= 8(1 +10) = 88
Hence, the magnifying power of the microscope is 88.

Question 13.
A small telescope has an objective lens of focal length 144 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 6.0cm. What is the magnifying power of the telescope? What is the separation between the objective and the eyepiece?
Answer:
Focal length of the objective lens, f₀ = 144 cm
Focal length of the eyepiece, f_e = 6.0 cm
The magnifying power of the telescope is given as, m = \(\frac{f_{o}}{f_{e}}=\frac{144}{6}\) = 24
The separation between the objective lens and the eyepiece is calculated as
= f_o + f_e
= 144 + 6 = 150 cm
Hence, the magnifying power of the telescope is 24 and the separation between the objective lens and the eyepiece is 150 cm.

Question 14.
(a) A giant refracting telescope at an observatory has an objective lens of focal length 15 m. If an eyepiece of focal length 1.0 cm is used, what is the angular magnification of the telescope?
(b) If this telescope is used to view the moon, what is the diameter of the image of the moon formed by the objective lens? The diameter of the moon is 3.48 x 10⁶ m, and the radius of lunar orbit is 3.8 x 10⁸ m.
Answer:
(a) Given f₀ = 15 m,
f_e = 1.0 cm = 1.0 x 10^-2 m
Angular magnification of telescope,
m = \(-\frac{f_{o}}{f_{e}}=-\frac{15}{1.0 \times 10^{-2}}\) = -1500
Negative sign shows that the final image is inverted.
(b) Let D be diameter of moon, d diameter of image of moon formed by objective and r be the distance of moon from objective lens, then

Question 15.
Use the mirror equation to deduce that:
(a) an object placed between f and 2f of a concave mirror produces a real image beyond 2f.
(b) a convex mirror always produces a virtual image independent of the location of the object.
(c) the virtual image produced by a convex mirror is always diminished In size and is located between the focus and the
pole.
(d) an object placed between the pole and focus of a concave mirror produces a virtual and enlarged image.
[Note: This exercise helps you deduce algebraically properties of images that one obtains from explicit ray diagrams.]
Answer:
(a) For a concave mirror, the focal length (f) is negative
∴ f<o
When the object is placed on the left side of the mirror, the object distance (u) is negative.
∴ u<O
For image distance v, we can write the mirror formula
\(\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{f}-\frac{1}{u}\) …………………………………… (1)
The object lies between f and 2f.
∴ 2f < u < f (∵ u and f are negative) ∴ \(\frac{1}{2 f}>\frac{1}{u}>\frac{1}{f}\)
\(-\frac{1}{2 f}<-\frac{1}{u}<-\frac{1}{f}\)
\(\frac{1}{f}-\frac{1}{2 f}<\frac{1}{f}-\frac{1}{u}<0\) ………………………………… (2)
Using equation (1), we get
\(\frac{1}{2 f}<\frac{1}{v}<0\)

∴ \(\frac{1}{v}\) is negative, i.e., v is negative.
\(\frac{1}{2 f}<\frac{1}{v}\) 2f > v
-v > -2 f
Therefore, the image lies beyond 2f.

(b) For a convex mirror, the focal length (f) is positive.
∴ f>o
When the object is placed on the left side of the mirror, the object distance (u) is negative.
∴ u<O
For image distance y, we have the mirror formula
\(\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{f}-\frac{1}{u}\)
Using equation (2), we can conclude that
\(\frac{1}{\nu}\) < 0 v v> 0
Thus, the image is formed on the back side of the mirror.
Hence, a convex mirror always produces a virtual image, regardless of the object distance.

(c) For a convex mirror, the focal length (f) is positive.
∴ f> 0
When the object is placed on the left side of the mirror, the object distance (u) is negative.
∴ u< 0
For image distance v, we have the mirror formula
\(\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{f}-\frac{1}{u}\)
But we have u < 0 ∴ \(\frac{1}{v}>\frac{1}{f}\)
v < f
Hence, the image formed is diminished and is located between the focus (f) and the pole.

(d) For a concave mirror, the focal length (f) is negative.
∴ f< 0
When the object is placed on the left side of the mirror, the object distance (u) is negative.
∴ u< 0 It is placed between the focus (f) and the pole. ∴f > u > 0
\(\frac{1}{f}<\frac{1}{u}\) < 0 \(\frac{1}{f}-\frac{1}{u}\) > 0
For image distance v, we have the mirror formula

The image is formed on the right side of the mirror. Hence, it is a virtual image.
For u < 0 and v > 0, we can write
\(\frac{1}{u}>\frac{1}{v}\)
v > u
Magnification, m = \(\frac{v}{u}\) > 1 u
Hence, the formed image is enlarged.

Question 16.
A small pin fixed on a tabletop is viewed from above from a distance of 50 cm. By what distance would the pin appear to be raised if it is viewed from the same point through a 15 cm thick glass slab held parallel to the table? Refractive index of glass = 1.5. Does the answer depend on the location of the slab?
Answer:
Actual depth of the pin, d = 15cm
Apparent depth of the pin = d’
Refractive index of glass, µ = 1.5

Ratio of actual depth to the apparent depth is equal to the refractive index of glass, i.e.
µ = \(\frac{d}{d^{\prime}}\)
∴ d’ = \(\frac{d}{\mu}\)
= \(\frac{15}{1.5}\) = 10 cm
The distance at which the pin appears to be raised = d-d’=15-10 = 5 cm
For a small angle of incidence, this distance does not depend upon the location of the slab.

Question 17.
(a) Figure 9.35 shows a cross-section of a ‘light pipe’ made of a glass fibre of refractive index 1.68. The outer covering of the pipe is made of a material of refractive index 1.44. What is the range of the angles of the incident rays with the axis of the pipe for which total reflections inside the pipe take place, as shown in the figure.
(b) What is the answer if there is no outer covering of the pipe?

Answer:
(a) Refractive index of the glass fibre, µ₂ = 1.68
Refractive index of the outer covering of the pipe, µ₁ =1.44
Angle of incidence = i
Angle of refraction = r
Angle of incidence at the interface = i’

The refractive index (µ) of the inner core-outer core interface is given as
µ = \(\frac{\mu_{2}}{\mu_{1}}=\frac{1}{\sin i^{\prime}}\)
sin i’ = \(\frac{\mu_{1}}{\mu_{2}}=\frac{1.44}{1.68}\) = 0.8571
∴ i’ = 59°

For the critical angle, total internal reflection (TIR) takes place only when i > i’. i.e., i > 59°
Maximum angle of reflection, r_max = 90°-i’ = 90°-59°= 31°
Let, i_max be the maximum angle of incidence.
The refractive index at the air – glass interface, µ₂ =1.68
µ₂ = \(\frac{\sin i_{\max }}{\sin r_{\max }}\)
sin i_max = µ₂ sin r_max = 1.68 sin31°
= 1.68 x 0.5150
= 0.8652
∴i_max = sin^-1 (0.8652) ≈ 60°
Thus, all the rays incident at angles lying in the range 0 < i < 60° will suffer total internal reflection.

(b) If the outer covering of the pipe is not present, then
Refractive index of the outer pipe, µ₁ = Refractive index of air = 1
For the angle of incidence i =90°, we can write Snell’s law at the air-pipe interface as
\(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) = µ₂ = 1.68
sin r = \(\frac{\sin 90^{\circ}}{1.68}=\frac{1}{1.68}\)
r = sin^-1(0.5952)
∴ i’ = 90°-36.5°= 53.5°
Since i’ > r, all incident rays will suffer total internal reflection.

Question 18.
Answer the following questions:
(a) You have learnt that plane and convex mirrors produce virtual images of objects. Can they produce real images under some circumstances? Explain.
(b) A virtual image, we always say, cannot be caught on a screen. Yet when we ‘see’ a virtual image, we are obviously bringing it onto the ‘screen’(i.e., the retina) of our eye. Is there a contradiction?
(c) A diver underwater, looks obliquely at a fisherman standing on the bank of a lake. Would the fisherman look taller or shorter to the diver than what he actually is?
(d) Does the apparent depth of a tank of water change if viewed obliquely? If so, does the apparent depth increase or decrease?
(e) The refractive index of diamond is much greater than that – of ordinary glass. Is this fact of some use to a diamond cutter?
Answer:
(a) Yes, they produce real images under some circumstances. If the object is virtual, i.e., if the light rays converging at a point behind a plane mirror (or a convex mirror) are reflected to a point on a screen placed in front of the mirror, then a real image will be formed.

(b) No, there is no contradiction. A virtual image is formed when light rays diverge. The convex lens of the eye causes these divergent rays to converge at the retina. In this case, the virtual image serves as an object for the lens to produce a real image.

(c) The diver is in the water and the fisherman is on land (i.e., in the air). Water is a denser medium than air. It is given that the diver is viewing the fisherman. This indicates that the light rays are traveling from a denser medium to a rarer medium. Hence, the refracted rays will move away from the normal. As a result, the fisherman will appear to be taller.

(d) Yes, the apparent depth of a tank of water changes when viewed obliquely. This is because light bends on traveling from one medium to another. The apparent depth of the tank, when viewed obliquely, is less than the near-normal viewing.

(e) Yes, the refractive index of diamond (2.42) is more than that of ordinary glass (1.5). The critical angle for diamond is less than that for glass. A diamond cutter uses a large angle of incidence to ensure that the light entering the diamond is totally reflected from its faces. This is the reason for the sparkling effect of a diamond.

Question 19.
The image of a small electric bulb on the wall of a room is to be obtained on the opposite wall 3 m away by means of a large convex lens. What is the maximum possible focal length of the lens required for the purpose? ’’
Answer:
Here, u + v = 3 m, :.v = 3 -u
From lens formula,

or u = \(\frac{3 \pm \sqrt{3^{2}-4.3 f}}{2}\)
For real solution, 9 -12, f should be positive.
It., 9 -12f > 0
or 9 >12f.
or f < \(\frac{9}{12}\) < \(\frac{3}{4}\) m
∴ The maximum focal length of the lens required for the purpose is \(\frac{3}{4}\) m
i.e, f_max = 0.7 m

Question 20.
A screen is placed 90 cm from an object. The image of the object on the screen is formed by a convex lens at two different locations separated by 20 cm. Determine the focal length of the lens.
Answer:
Here, O is a position of object and I is position of image (screen).
Distance OI = 90 cm
L₁ and L₂ are the two positions of the lens.
∴ Distance between L₁ and L₂ = O₁ O₂ = 20 cm
For Position L₁ of the Lens: Let x be the distance of the object from the lens.
∴ u₁ = -x
∴ Distance of the image from the lens, v₁ = +(90 – x)

If f be the focal length of the lens, then using lens formula,
\(-\frac{1}{u}+\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{f}\) we get
\(-\frac{1}{-x}+\frac{1}{90-x}=\frac{1}{f}\)
or \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{x}+\frac{1}{90-x}\) ……………………………….. (1)
For Position L₂ of the Lens : Let u₂ and v₂ be the distances of the object and image from the lens in this position.
∴ u₂=-(X + 20),
v₂ = +[90-(x+20)] = +(70-x)
∴ Using lens formula,

Question 21.
(a) Determine the ‘effective focal length’ of the combination of the two lenses in Exercise 9.10, if they are placed 8.0 cm apart with their principal axes coincident. Does the answer depend on which side of the combination a beam of parallel light is incident? Is the notion of effective focal length of this system useful at all?

(b) An object 1.5 cm in size is placed on the side of the convex lens in the arrangement (a) above. The distance between the object and the convex lens is 40 cm. Determine the magnification produced by the two-lens system and the size of the image.
Answer:
Focal length of the convex lens, f₁ = 30 cm
Focal length of the concave lens,f₂ = -20 cm
Distance between the two lenses, d = 8.0 cm

(a)
(i) When the parallel beam of light is incident on the convex lens first.
According to the lens formula, we have
\(\frac{1}{v_{1}}-\frac{1}{u_{1}}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}\)
where, μ₁ = Object distance = ∞, v₁ = Image distance = ?
\(\frac{1}{v_{1}}=\frac{1}{30}-\frac{1}{\infty}=\frac{1}{30}\)
∴ v₁ = 30 cm
The image will act as a virtual object for the concave lens. Applying lens formula to the concave lens, we have
\(\frac{1}{v_{2}}-\frac{1}{u_{2}}=\frac{1}{f_{2}}\)
where, u₂ = Object distance = (30 – d) = 30 – 8 = 22 cm,
v₂ = Image distance=?
\(\frac{1}{v_{2}}=\frac{1}{22}-\frac{1}{20}=\frac{10-11}{220}=\frac{-1}{220}\)
∴ v₂ = -220 cm
The parallel incident beam appears to diverge from a point that is \(\left(220-\frac{d}{2}=220-\frac{8}{2}=220-4=216 \mathrm{~cm}\right)\) from the centre of the combination of the two lenses.

(ii) When the parallel beam of light is incident, on the concave lens first. According to the lens formula, we have
\(\frac{1}{v_{2}}-\frac{1}{u_{2}}=\frac{1}{f_{2}}\)
\(\frac{1}{v_{2}}=\frac{1}{f_{2}}+\frac{1}{u_{2}}\)
where, u₂ = Object distance = -∞, v₂ = Image distance = ?
\(\frac{1}{v_{2}}=\frac{1}{-20}+\frac{1}{-\infty}=-\frac{1}{20}\)
∴ v₂ = -20 cm
The image will act as a real object for the .convex lens.
Applying lens formula to the convex lens, we have
\(\frac{1}{v_{1}}-\frac{1}{u_{1}}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}\)
where, u₁ = Object distance = -(20 + d) = -(20 + 8) = -28 cm v₁ = Image distance = ?
\(\frac{1}{v_{1}}=\frac{1}{30}+\frac{1}{-28}=\frac{14-15}{420}=\frac{-1}{420}\)
∴ v₁ = -420 cm
Hence, the parallel incident beam appear to diverge from a point that is (420 – 4 = 416 cm) from the left of the centre of the combination of the two lenses. The answer depends on the side of the combination at which the parallel beam of light is incident. The notion of effective focal length does not seem to be useful for this combination.

(b) Height of the object, h₁ =1.5 cm
Object distance from the side of the convex lens, u₁ = -40 cm
|u_i| = 40 cm

According to the lens formula
\(\frac{1}{v_{1}}-\frac{1}{u_{1}}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}\)
where, v₁ = Image distance =?
\(\frac{1}{v_{1}}=\frac{1}{30}+\frac{1}{-40}=\frac{4-3}{120}=\frac{1}{120}\)
∴ v₁ = 120 cm
Magnification, m= \(\frac{v_{1}}{\left|u_{1}\right|}=\frac{120}{40}\) = 3

Hence, the magnification due to the convex lens is 3.
The image formed by the convex lens acts as an object for the concave lens.
According to the lens formula
\(\frac{1}{v_{2}}-\frac{1}{u_{2}}=\frac{1}{f_{2}}\)
where,
u₂ = Object distance = +(120 —8)=112 cm
v₂= Image distance =?

Magnification, m’ = \(\left|\frac{v_{2}}{u_{2}}\right|=\frac{2240}{92} \times \frac{1}{112}=\frac{20}{92}\)
Hence, the magnification due to the concave lens is \(\frac{20}{92}\)
The magnification produced by the combination of the two lenses is calculated as m x m’ = \(3 \times \frac{20}{92}=\frac{60}{92}\) = 0.652
The magnification of the combination is given as
\(\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}\) = 0.652
h₂ = 0.652 x h₁
where, h₁ = Object size = 1.5 cm,
h₂ = Size of the image
∴ h₂ = 0.652 x 1.5 = 0.98 cm
Hence, the height of the image is 0.98 cm.

Question 22.
At what angle should a ray of light be incident on the face of a prism of refracting angle 60° so that it just suffers total internal reflection at the other face? The refractive index of the material of the prism is 1.524.
Answer:
The incident, refracted, and emergent rays associated with a glass prism ABC are shown in the given figure

Angle of prism, A = 60°
Refractive index of the prism, μ = 1.524
i₁ = Incident angle
r₂ = Refracted angle
r₂ = Angle of incidence at the face
AC = e = Emergent angle = 90°

According to Snell’s law, for face AC, we can have sine
\(\frac{\sin e}{\sin r_{2}}\) = μ

It is clear from the figure that angle A = r₁ + r₂
According to Snell’s law, we have the relation
μ = \(\frac{\sin i_{1}}{\sin r_{1}} \)
sin i₁ = μ sin r₁
= 1.524 x sin19°= 0.496
∴ i₁= 29.75°
Hence, the angle of incidence is 29.75°.

Question 23.
You are given prisms made of crown glass and flint glass with a wide variety of angles. Suggest a combination of prisms which will
(a) deviate a pencil of white light without much dispersion,
(b) disperse (and displace) a pencil of white light without much deviation.
Answer:
(a) Place the two prisms beside each other. Make sure that their bases are on the opposite sides of the incident white light, with their faces touching each other. When the white light is incident on the first prism, it will get dispersed. When this dispersed light is incident on the second prism, it will recombine and white light will emerge from the combination of the two prisms.

(b) Take the system of the two prisms as suggested in answer (a). Adjust (increase) the angle of the flint-glass-prism so that the deviations due to the combination of the prisms become equal. This combination will disperse the pencil of white light without much deviation.

Question 24.
For a normal eye, the far point is at infinity and the near point of distinct vision is about 25 cm in front of the eye. The cornea of . the eye provides a converging power of about 40 dioptres, and the least converging power of the eye-lens behind the cornea is about 20 dioptres. From this rough data estimate the range of accommodation (i.e., the range of converging power of the eye-lens) of a normal eye.
Answer:
Least distance of distinct vision, d = 25 cm
Far point of a normal eye, d’ = ∞
Converging power of the cornea, P_c = 40 D
Least converging power of the eye- lens, P_e = 20 D
To see the objects at infinity, the eye uses its least converging power.
Power of the eye-lens, P = P_c + P_e =40+20 = 60 D
Power of the eye-lens is given as
P = \(\frac{1}{\text { Focal length of the eye lens }(f)} \)
f = \(=\frac{1}{P}=\frac{1}{60 D}=\frac{100}{60}=\frac{5}{3}\) cm

To focus an object at the near point, object distance (u) = -d = -25 cm
Focal length of the eye-lens = Distance between the cornea and the retina = Image distance
Hence, image distance, v = \( \frac{5}{3}\) cm
According to the lens formula, we can write
\(\frac{1}{f^{\prime}}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\)
Where f’ = Focal length

Power of the eye-lens = 64-40 = 24 D
Hence, the range of accommodation of the eye-lens is from 20 D to24D.

Question 25.
Does short-sightedness (myopia) or long-sightedness (hypermetropia) imply necessarily that the eye has partially lost its ability of accommodation? If not, what might cause these defects of vision?
Answer:
A myopic or hypermetropic person can also possess the normal ability of accommodation of the eye-lens. Myopia occurs when the eyeballs get elongated from front to back. Hypermetropia occurs when the eye-balls get shortened.
When the eye-lens loses its ability of accommodation, the defect is called presbyopia.

Question 26.
A myopic person has been using spectacles of power -1.0 dioptre for distant vision. During old age he also needs to use separate reading glass of power +2.0 dioptres. Explain what may have happened.
Answer:
The power of the spectacles used by the myopic person, P = -1.0 D
Focal length of the spectacles, f = \(\frac{1}{P}=\frac{1}{-1 \times 10^{-2}}\) = -100 cm
Hence, the far point of the person is 100 cm. He might have a normal near point of 25 cm. When he uses the spectacles, the objects placed at infinity produce virtual images at 100 cm.
He uses the ability of accommodation of the eye-lens to see the objects placed between 100 cm and 25 cm.
During old age, the person uses reading glasses of power, P’ = +2D The ability of accommodation is lost in old age.
This defect is called presbyopia. As a result, he is unable to see clearly the objects placed at 25 cm.

Question 27.
A person looking at a person wearing a shirt with a pattern comprising vertical and horizontal lines is able to see the vertical lines more distinctly than the horizontal ones. What is this defect due to? How is such a defect of vision corrected?
Answer:
In the given case, the person is able to see vertical lines more distinctly than horizontal lines. This means that the refracting system (cornea and eye-lens) of the eye is not working in the same way in different planes. This defect is tailed astigmatism. The person’s eye has enough curvature in the vertical plane. However, the curvature in the horizontal plane is insufficient. Hence, sharp images of the vertical lines are formed on the retina, but horizontal lines appear blurred. This defect can be corrected by using cylindrical lenses.

Question 28.
A man with normal near point (25cm) reads a book with small print using a magnifying glass: a thin convex lens of focal length 5 cm.
(a) What is the closest and the farthest distance at which he should keep the lens from the page so that he can read the book when viewing through the magnifying glass?
(b) What is the maximum and the minimum angular magnification (magnifying power) possible using the above simple microscope?
Answer:
(a) Focal length of the magnifying glass, f = 5 cm
Least distance of distinct vision, d = 25 cm
Closest object distance = u
Image distance, v = -d = -25 cm
According to the lens formula, we have


Hence, the closest distance at which the person can read the book is 4.167 cm.
For the object at the farthest distance (u’), the image distance (v’) = ∞

According to the lens formula, we have

∴ u’ = -5 cm
Hence, the farthest distance at which the person can read the book is 5 cm.
(b) Maximum angular magnification is given by the relation
α_max= \(\frac{d}{|u|}=\frac{25}{\frac{25}{6}} \) = 6
Minimum angular magnification is given by the relation
α_min = \(\frac{d}{\left|u^{\prime}\right|}=\frac{25}{5} \) = 5.

Question 29.
A card sheet divided into squares each of size 1 mm² is being viewed at a distance of 9 cm through a magnifying glass (a converging lens of focal length 10 cm) held close to the eye.
(a) What is the magnification produced by the lens? How much is the area of each square in the virtual image?
(b) What is the angular magnification (magnifying power) of the lens?
(c) Is the magnification in (a) equal to the magnifying power in (b)?
Explain.
Answer:
(a) Area of each square, A = 1 mm²
Object distance, u = -9 cm
Focal length of the converging lens, f = 10 cm
For image distance v, the lens formula can be written as

∴ v = -90 cm
Magnification, m = \(=\frac{v}{u}=\frac{-90}{-9}\) =10
∴ Area of each square in the virtual image = (10)²A
= 10² x 1 =100 mm² = 1 cm²
(b) Magnifying power of the lens = \(\frac{d}{|u|}=\frac{25}{9}\) = 2.8
(c) The magnification in (a) is not the same as the magnifying power in(b).
The magnification magnitude is \(\left(\left|\frac{v}{u}\right|\right)\) and the magnifying power is \(\left(\frac{d}{|u|}\right) \) .
The two quantities will be equal when the image is formed at the near point (25 cm).

Question 30.
(a) At what distance should the lens be held from the figure in Exercise 9.29 in order to view the squares distinctly with the maximum possible magnifying power?
(b) What is the magnification in this case?
(c) Is the magnification equal to the magnifying power in this case? Explain.
Answer:
(a) The maximum possible magnification is obtained when the image is formed at the near point (d = 25cm).
Image distance, v = -d = -25 cm
Focal length, f = 10 cm
Object distance = u
According to the lens formula, we have

∴ u = \(-\frac{50}{7}\) = -7.14 cm
Hence, to view the squares distinctly, the, lens should be kept 7.14 cm away from them. .
(b) Magnifying = \(\left|\frac{v}{u}\right|=\frac{25}{50}\) =3.5
(c) Magnifying power = \(\frac{d}{u}=\frac{25}{\frac{50}{7}}\) = 3.5
Since the image is formed at the near point (25 cm), the magnifying power is equal to the magnitude of magnification.

Question 31.
What should be the distance between the object in Exercise 9.30 and the magnifying glass if the virtual image of each square in the figure is to have an area of 6.25 mm². Would you be able to see the squares distinctly with your eyes very close to the magnifier? [Note: Exercises 9.29 to 9.31 will help you clearly understand the difference between magnification in absolute size and the angular magnification (or magnifying power) of an instrument.]
Answer:
Area of the virtual image of each square, A = 6.25 mm
Area of each square, A₀ = 1 mm²
Hence, the linear magnification of the object can be calculated as
m = \(\sqrt{\frac{A}{A_{0}}}=\sqrt{\frac{6.25}{1}} \) = 2.5
But m = \(\frac{\text { Image distance }(v)}{\text { Object distance }(u)} \)
∴ v = mu = 2.5 u
Focal length of the magnifying glass, f = 10 cm

According to the lens formula, we have the relation

∴ u = \(-\frac{1.5 \times 10}{2.5}\) = -6 cm
and v = 2.5 u = 2.5 x 6 = -15 cm
The virtual image is formed at a distance of 15 cm, which is less than the near point (i.e., 25 cm) of a normal eye. Hence, it cannot be seen by the eyes distinctly.

Question 32.
Answer the following questions:
(a) The angle subtended at the eye by an object is equal to the angle subtended at the eye by the virtual image produced by a magnifying glass. In what sense then does a magnifying glass provide angular magnification?
(b) In viewing through a magnifying glass, one usually positions one’s eyes very close to the lens. Does angular magnification change if the eye is moved back?
(c) Magnifying power of a simple microscope is inversely proportional to the focal length of the lens. What then stops us from using a convex lens of smaller and smaller focal length and achieving greater and greater magnifying power?
(d) Why must both the objective and the eyepiece of a compound microscope have short focal lengths?
(e) When viewing through a compound microscope, our eyes should be positioned not on the eyepiece but a short distance away from it for best viewing. Why? How much should be that short distance between the eye and eyepiece?
Answer:
(a) Though the image size is bigger than the object, the angular size of the image is equal to the angular size of the object. A magnifying glass helps one see the objects placed closer than the least distance of distinct vision (i.e., 25 cm). A closer object causes a larger angular size. A magnifying glass provides angular magnification. Without magnification, the object cannot be placed closer to the eye. With magnification, the object can be placed much closer to the eye.

(b) Yes, the angular magnification changes when the distance between the eye and a magnifying glass is increased, the angular magnification decreases a little. This is because the angle subtended at the eye is slightly less than the angle subtended at the lens. Image distance does not have any effect on angular magnification.

(c) The focal length of a convex lens cannot be decreased by a greater amount. This is because making lenses having very small focal lengths is not easy. Spherical and chromatic aberrations are produced by a convex lens having a very small focal length.

(d) The ang lar magificarin produced by’the eyepiece of a compound microscope is \(\left[\left(\frac{25}{f_{e}}\right)+1\right]\)
Where f_e = Focal length of the eyepiece
It can be inferred that f_e is small, then angular magnification of the eyepiece will be large.
The angular magnification of the objective lens of a compound microscope is given as
\(\frac{1}{\left(\left|u_{o}\right| f_{o}\right)}\)
Where, u₀ = Object distance for the objective lens, f₀ = Focal length of the objective
The magnification is large when u₀> f₀ . In the case of a microscope, the object is kept close to the objective lens. Hence, the object distance is very little.
Since u₀ is small, f₀ will be even smaller. Therefore, f_e and f₀ are both small in the given condition.

(e) When we place our eyes too close to the eyepiece of a compound microscope, we are unable to collect much-refracted light. As a result, the field of view decreases substantially. Hence, the clarity of the image gets blurred.
The best position of the eye for viewing through a compound microscope is at the eye-ring attached to the eyepiece. The precise location of the eye depends on the separation between the objective lens and the eyepiece.

Question 33.
An angular magnification (magnifying power) of 30X is desired using an objective of focal length 1.25 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 5 cm. How will you set up the compound microscope?
Answer:
Focal length of the objective lens, f₀ = 1.25 cm
Focal length of the eyepiece, f_e = 5 cm
Least distance of distinct vision, d = 25 cm

Angular magnification of the compound microscope = 30X
Total magnifying power of the compound microscope, m = 30
The angular magnification of the eyepiece is given by the relation
m_e = \(\left(1+\frac{d}{f_{e}}\right)=\left(1+\frac{25}{5}\right)\) = 1+5 = 6
The angular magnification of the objective lens (m₀) is related to me as
m_om_e=m
or m₀ = \(\frac{m}{m_{e}}=\frac{30}{6}\) = 5

We also have the relation
m = \( \frac{\text { Image distance for the objective lens }\left(v_{o}\right)}{\text { Object distance for the objective lens }\left(-u_{0}\right)}\)
5 = \(\frac{v_{o}}{-u_{o}}\)
∴ v₀ = -5u₀ …………………………….. (1)
Applying the lens formula for the objective lens

and v₀ = -5u₀
= -5 x (-1.5) = 7.5 cm
The object should be placed 1.5 cm away from the objective lens to obtain the desired magnification.
Applying the lens formula for the eyepiece
\(\frac{1}{v_{e}}-\frac{1}{u_{e}}=\frac{1}{f_{e}}\)
where,
v_e = Image distance for the eyepiece = -d = -25 cm
u_e = Object distance for the eyepiece
\(\frac{1}{u_{e}}=\frac{1}{v_{e}}-\frac{1}{f_{e}}=\frac{-1}{25}-\frac{1}{5}=-\frac{6}{25}\)
u_e =-4.17 cm
Separation between the objective lens and the eyepiece = \(\left|u_{e}\right|+\left|v_{o}\right|\)
= 4.17 + 7.5 = 11.67 cm
Therefore, the separation between the objective lens and the eyepiece should be 11.67 cm.

Question 34.
A small telescope has an objective lens of focal length 140 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 5.0 cm. What is the magnifying power of the telescope for viewing distant objects when
(a) the telescope is in normal adjustment (i.e., when the final image is at infinity)?
(b) the final image is formed at the least distance of distinct vision (25 cm)?
Answer:
Focal length of the objective lens, f₀ =140 cm
Focal length of the eyepiece, f_e = 5 cm
Least distance of distinct vision, d = 25 cm
(a) When the telescope is in normal adjustment, its magnifying power is given as
m = \(\frac{f_{o}}{f_{e}}=\frac{140}{5} \) = 28
(b) When the final image is formed at d, the magnifying power of the telescope is given as
\(\frac{f_{o}}{f_{e}}\left[1+\frac{f_{e}}{d}\right]=\frac{140}{5}\left[1+\frac{5}{25}\right]\)
= 28[1 +0.2] = 28×1.2 = 33.6

Question 35.
(a) For the telescope described in Exercise 9.34 (a), what is the separation between the objective lens and the eyepiece?
(b) If this telescope is used to view a 100 m tall tower 3 km away, what is the height of the image of the tower formed by the objective lens?
(c) What is the height of the final image of the tower if it is formed at 25 cm?
Answer:
Focal length of the objective lens, f₀ =140 cm
Focal length of the eyepiece, f_e= 5 cm
(a) In normal adjustment, the separation between the objective lens and the eyepiece = f₀ + f_e = 140 + 5 = 145 cm
(b) Height of the tower, h₁ = 100 m
Distance of the tower (object) from the telescope, u = 3 km = 3000 m
The angle subtended by the tower at the telescope is given as
θ’ = \(\frac{h_{2}}{f_{o}}=\frac{h_{2}}{140}\) rad
where,
h₂ = Height of the image of the tower formed by the objective lens
\(\frac{1}{30}=\frac{h_{2}}{140}\) (∵θ=θ’)
∴ h₂ = \(\frac{140}{30}\) = 4.7 cm
Therefore, the objective lens forms a 4.7 cm tall image of the tower.

(c) Image is formed at a distance, d = 25 cm
The magnification of the eyepiece is given by the relation
m = 1 + \(\frac{d}{f_{e}}\)
= 1+ \(\frac{25}{5}\) =1 + 5 = 6
Height of the final image = mh₂ = 6 x 4.7 = 28.2 cm
Hence, the height of the final image of the tower is 28.2 cm.

Question 36.
A Cassegrain telescope uses two mirrors as shown in Fig. 9.33. Such a telescope is built with the mirrors 20 mm apart.
If the radius of curvature of the large mirror is 220 mm and the small mirror is 140 mm, where will the final image of an object at infinity be?
Answer:
Given, r₁ = 220 mm, f₁ = \(\frac{r_{1}}{2}\) = 110 mm = 11 cm
r₂ = 140 mm, f₂ = \(\frac{r_{2}}{2}\) = 70 mm = 7.0 cm
Distance between mirrors, d = 20 mm = 2.0 cm
The parallel incident rays coming from distant objects fall on the concave mirror and try to be focused at the principal focus of concave lens, i. e., v₁ = -f₁ = -11 cm
But in the path of rays reflected from concave mirror, a convex mirror is placed. Therefore the image formed by the concave mirror acts as a virtual object for convex mirror.

For convex mirror f₂ = -7.0 cm, u₂ = -(11 -2) = -9 cm

v₂ = \(-\frac{63}{2}\) cm = -31.5 cm
This is the distance of the final image formed by the convex mirror. Thus, the final image is formed at a distance of 31.5 cm from the smaller (convex) mirror behind the bigger mirror.

Question 37.
Light incident normally on a plane mirror attached to a galvanometer coil retraces backward as shown in Fig. 9.36. A current in the coil produces a deflection of 3.5° of the mirror. What is the displacement of the reflected spot of light on a screen placed 1.5 m away?

Answer:
Angle of deflection, θ = 3.5°
Distance of the screen from the mirror, D = 1.5 m
The reflected rays get deflected by an amount twice the angle of deflection i.e., 2θ = 2 x 3.5 = 7.0°
The displacement (d) of the reflected spot of light on the screen is given as
tan 2θ = \(\frac{d}{1.5}\) d =1.5 x tan7°= 0.184 m = 18.4 cm
Hence, the displacement of the reflected spot of light is 18.4 cm.

Question 38.
Figure 9.37 shows an biconvex lens (of refractive index 1.50) in contact with a liquid layer on top of a plane mirror.
A small needle with its tip on the principal axis is moved along the axis until its inverted image is found at the position of the needle. The distance of the needle from the lens is measured to be 45.0 cm. The liquid is removed and the experiment is repeated. The new distance is measured to he 30.0 cm. What is the refractive index of the liquid?

Answer:
Focal length of the convex lens, f₁ = 30 cm
The liquid acts as a mirror. Focal length of the liquid = f₂
Focal length of the system (convex lens + liquid), f = 45 cm
For a pair of optical systems placed in contact, the equivalent focal length is given as
\(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}+\frac{1}{f_{2}}\)
\(\frac{1}{f_{2}}=\frac{1}{f}-\frac{1}{f_{1}}\)
= \(\frac{1}{45}-\frac{1}{30}=-\frac{1}{90}\)
∴ f₂ = -90 cm
Let the refractive index of the lens be μ₁ and the radius of curvature of one surface be R. Hence, the radius of curvature of the other surface is R.
R can be obtained using the relation \(\frac{1}{f_{1}}=\left(\mu_{1}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{R}+\frac{1}{-R}\right)\)
\(\frac{1}{30}=(1.5-1)\left(\frac{2}{R}\right)\)
∴ R = \(\frac{30}{0.5 \times 2}\) = 30 cm

Let μ₂ be the refractive index of the liquid.
Radius of curvature of the liquid on the side of the plane minor = ∞
Radius of curvature of the liquid on the side of the lens, R = -30 cm
The value of μ₂, can be calculated using the relation
\(\frac{1}{f_{2}}=\left(\mu_{2}-1\right)\left[\frac{1}{-R}-\frac{1}{\infty}\right]\)
\(\frac{-1}{90}=\left(\mu_{2}-1\right)\left[\frac{1}{+30}-0\right]\)
μ₂ – 1 = \(\frac{1}{3} \)
∴ μ₂ = \(\frac{4}{3} \) = 133
Hence, the refractive index of the liquid is 1.33.

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physics Book Solutions Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physics Chapter 6 Electromagnetic Induction

PSEB 12th Class Physics Guide Electromagnetic Induction Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Predict the direction of induced current in the situations described by the following Figs. 6.18 (a) to (f).


Answer:
(a) As the magnet moves towards the solenoid, the magnetic flux linked with the solenoid increases. According to Lenz’s law, the induced e.m.f. produced in the solenoid in such that it opposes the very cause producing it i. e., it opposes the motion of the magnet. Hence the face q of it becomes the south pole and p becomes north pole. Therefore, the current will flow along pqin the coili. e., along qrpqin this figurei. e., clockwise when seen from the side of the magnet according to clock rule.

(b) As the north pole moves away from xy coil, so the magnetic flux linked with this coil decreases. Thus according to Lenz’s law, the induced e.m.f. produced in the coil will oppose the motion of the magnet. Hence the face, X becomes S-pole, so the current will flow in the clockwise direction i.e., along yzx in the cone.

For coil pq, the south pole of the magnet moves towards end q and thus this end will acquire south polarity so as to oppose the motion of the magnet, hence the current will flow along prq in the coil.

(c) The induced current will be in the anticlockwise direction i.e., along yzx.

(d) The induced current will be in the clockwise direction i.e., along zyx.

(e) The battery current in the left coil will be from right to left, so by mutual induction, the induced current in the right coil will be in the opposite direction i.e., from left to right or along xry.

(f) In this case, there is no change in magnetic flux linked with the wire, so no current will flow through the wire since there is no induced current as the field lines lie in the plane of the loop.

Question 2.
Use Lenz’s law to determine the direction of induced current in the situations described by Fig. 6.19.
(a) A wire of irregular shape turning into a circular shape;
(b) A circular loop being deformed into a narrow straight wire.

(a) When a wire of irregular shape turns into a circular loop, the magnetic flux linked with the loop increases due to increase in area. The circular loop has greater area than the loop of irregular shape. The induced e.m.f. will cause current to flow in such a direction so that the wire forming the loop is pulled inward from all sides i.e., current must flow in the direction adcba as shown in Fig. (a) i.e., in anticlock-wise direction so that the magnetic field produced by the current ((directed out of the paper) opposes the applied field.

In Fig. (b), a circular loop deforms into a narrow straight wire i.e., upper side of loop should move downwards and lower end should move upwards to oppose the motion of the circular loop, thus its area decreases as a result of which the magnetic flux linked with it decreases. To oppose the decrease in magnetic flux, the induced current should flow anti clockwise in the loop i. e., along a’d’ d b’ a’. Due to the flow of anti-clockwise current, the magnetic field produced will be out of the page and hence the applied field is supplemented.

Question 3.
A long solenoid with 15 turns per cm has a small loop of area 2.0 cm² placed inside the solenoid normal to its axis. If the current carried hy the solenoid changes steadily from 2.0 A to
4.0 A in 0.1 s, what is the induced emf in the loop while the current is changing?
Answer:
Number of turns per unit length of the solenoid, n = 15 turns/cm = 1500 turns/m
The solenoid has a small loop of area, A = 2.0 cm² = 2 × 10^-4 m²
Current carried by the solenoid changes from 2 A to 4 A.
.-. Change in current in the solenoid, dI = 4 – 2 = 2A
Change in time, dt = 0.1 s
We know that the magnetic field produced inside the solenoid is given by
B = μ₀nI
If Φ be the magnetic flux linked with the loop, then
Φ = BA = μ₀nI A
Induced emf in the solenoid is given by Faraday’s law as
e = –\(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\)
e = – \(\frac{d}{d t}\) (Φ) = –\(\frac{d}{d t}\) μ₀nI A
μ₀n A \(\frac{d I}{d t}\)
∴ Magnitude of e is given by
= A μ₀n × (\(\frac{d I}{d t}\))
= 2 × 10^-4 × 4π × 10^-7 × 500 × \(\frac{2}{0.1}\)
7.54 × 10 ^-6 V
Hence, the induced voltage in the loop is = 7.54 × 10 ^-6 V

Question 4.
A rectangular wire loop of sides 8 cm and 2 cm with a small cut is moving out of a region of uniform magnetic field of magnitude 0.3 T directed normal to the loop. What is the emf developed across the cut if the velocity of the loop is 1 cm s^-1 in a direction normal to the (a) longer side, (b) shorter side of the loop? For how long does the induced voltage last in each case?
Answer:
Length of the rectangular wire, l = 8 cm = 0.08 m
Width of the rectangular wire, b = 2 cm = 0.02 m
Hence, area of the rectangular loop A = lb
= 0.08 × 0.02
= 16 × 10^-4 m²
Magnetic field strength, B = 0.3 T
Velocity of the loop, v = 1 cm/s = 0.01 m / s

(a) Emf developed in the loop is given as
e = Blv
= 0.3 × 0.08 × 0.01 = 2.4 × 10^-4 V

= \(\frac{b}{v}\) = \(\frac{0.02}{0.01}\) = 2 s
Hence, the induced voltage is 2.4 × 10^-4 V which lasts for 2s.

(b) Emf developed,
e = Bbv = 0.3 × 0.02 × 0.01 = 0.6 × 10^-4 V

\(\frac{l}{v}\) = \(\frac{0.08}{0.01}\) 8s
Hence, the induced voltage is 0.6 × 10^-4 V which lasts for 8 s.

Question 5.
A 1.0 m long metallic rod is rotated with an angular frequency of 400 rad s^-1 about an axis normal to the rod passing through its one end. The other end of the rod is in contact with a circular metallic ring. A constant and uniform magnetic field of 0.5 T parallel to the axis exists everywhere. Calculate the emf developed between the centre and the ring.
Answer:
Length of the rod, l = 1m
Angular frequency, ω = 400 rad/s
Magnetic field strength, B = 0.5 T
One end of the rod has zero linear velocity, while the other end has a linear velocity of l ω.
Average linear velocity of the rod, v = \(\frac{l \omega+0}{2}=\frac{l \omega}{2}\)
Emf developed between the centre and the ring,
e = Blv = Bl(\(\frac{l \omega}{2}\)) = \(\frac{B l^{2} \omega}{2}\)
= \(\frac{0.5 \times(1)^{2} \times 400}{2}\) = 100V
Hence, the emf developed between the centre and the ring is 100 V.

Question 6.
A circular coil of radius 8.0 cm and 20 turns is rotated about its vertical diameter with an angular speed of 50 rad s^-1 in a uniform horizontal magnetic field of magnitude 3.0 × 10^-2 T. Obtain the maximum and average emf induced in the coil. If the coil forms a closed loop of resistance 10 Ω, calculate the maximum value of current in the coil. Calculate the average power loss due to Joule heating. Where does this power come from?
Answer:
Here, n = number of turns in the coil = 20
r = radius ofcoil = 8.0 cm = 8 × 10^-2 m
ω = angular speed of the coil = 50 rad s^-1.
B = magnetic field = 3.0 × 10^-2 T
Let e₀ be the maximum e.m.f. in the coil = ?
and e_av be the average e.m.f. in the coil = ?
We know that the instantaneous e.m.f. produced in a coil is given by
e = BA ω sinωt.
for e to be maximum e_max, sin ωt = 1.
∴ e_max = B A n ω = B.πr² nω
where A = πr² is the area of the coil

i.e., e_av is zero as the average value of sincot for one complete cycle is always zero.
Now R = resistance of the closed loop formed by the coil = 10 Ω
Let I_max = maximum current in the coil = ?
∴ Using the relation,
I_max = \(\frac{e_{\max }}{R}\), we get
I_max = \(\frac{0.603}{10}\) = 0.0603 A
Let P_av be the average power loss due to Joule heating = ?
∴ P_av = \(\frac{e_{\max } \cdot I_{\max }}{2}\) = \(\frac{0.603 \times 0.0603}{2}\)
= 0.018 Watt
The induced current causes a torque opposing the rotation of the coil. An external agent must supply torque and do work to counter this torque in order to keep the coil rotating uniformly. Thus the source of the power dissipated as heat in the coil is the external agent i. e., rotor.

Question 7.
A horizontal straight wire 10 m long extending from east to west is falling with a speed of 5.0 m s^-1, at right angles to the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field, 0.30 × 10^-4 Wb m^-2.
(a) What is the instantaneous value of the emf induced in the wire?
(b) What is the direction of the emf?
(c) Which end of the wire is at the higher electrical potential?
Answer:
Length of the wire, l = 10 m
Falling speed of the wire, v = 5.0 m/s
Magnetic field strength, B = 0.3 × 10^-4 Wb m^-2

(a) emf induced in the wire,
e = Blv = 0.3 × 10^-4 × 5 × 10
= 1.5 × 10^-3 V

(b) Using Fleming’s right hand rule, it can be inferred that the direction of the induced emf is from west to east.

(c) The eastern end of the wire is at a higher electrical potential.

Question 8.
Current in a circuit falls from 5.0 A to 0.0 A in 0.1 s. If an average emf of 200 V induced, give an estimate of the self-inductance of the circuit.
Initial current, I₁ = 5.0 A
Final current, I₂ = 0.0 A
Change in current, dl = I₁ – I₂ = 5 – 0 = 5 A
Time taken for the change, dt = 0.1 s
Average emf, e = 200 V
For self-inductance (I) of the circuit, we have the relation for average emf as
e = L\(\frac{d I}{d t}\)
L = \(\frac{e}{\left(\frac{d I}{d t}\right)}\)
= \(\frac{200}{\frac{5}{0.1}}=\frac{200 \times 0.1}{5}\) 4H
Hence, the self induction of the circuit is 4 H.

Question 9.
A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance of 1.5 H. If the current in one coil changes from 0 to 20 A in 0.5 s, what is the change of flux linkage with the other coil?
Answer:
Mutual inductance of the pair of coils, μ = 1.5 H
Initial current, I₁ = 0 A
Final current, I₂ – 20 A
Change in current, dI = I₂ – I₁ = 20 – 0 = 20 A
Time taken for the change, dt = 0.5 s
Induced emf, e = \(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\) ………… (1)

Where d Φ is the change in the flux linkage with the coil.
Emf is related with mutual inductance as
e = μ\(\frac{d I}{d t}\) ……………. (2)
Equating equations (1) and (2), we get
\(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\) = μ\(\frac{d I}{d t}\)
or dΦ = μdI
∴ dΦ = 1.5 × (20) = 30 Wb
Hence, the change in the flux linkage is 30 Wb.

Question 10.
A jet plane is travelling towards west at a speed of 1800 km/h. What is the voltage difference developed between the ends of the wings having a span of 25 m, if the Earth’s magnetic field at the location has a magnitude of 5 × 10^-4 T and the dip angle is 30°.
Answer:
Speed of the jet plane, v = 1800 km/h = 1800 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 500 m/s
Wing span of the jet plane, l = 25 m
Earth’s magnetic field strength, B = 5.0 × 10^-4 T
Angle of dip, δ = 30°
Vertical component of Earth’s magnetic field,
B_V = B sinδ
= 5 × 10^-4 × sin30°
= 5 × 10^-4 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 2.5 × 10^-4 T
Voltage difference between the ends of the wing can be calculated as
e = (B_V) × l × v
= 2.5 × 10^-4 × 25 × 500 = 3.125 V
Hence, the voltage difference developed between the ends of the wings is 3.125 V.

Question 11.
Suppose the loop in Exercise 6.4 is stationary but the current feeding the electromagnet that produces the magnetic field is gradually reduced so that.the field decreases from its initial value of 0.3 T at the rate of 0.02 Ts^-1. If the cut is joined and the loop has a resistance of 1.6 Ω, how much power is dissipated by the loop as heat? What is the source of this power?
Answer:
Sides of the rectangular wire loop are 8 cm and 2 cm.
Hence, area of the rectangular wire loop,
A = length × width = 8 × 2 = 16 cm
= 16 × 10^-4 m²
Initial value of the magnetic field, B = 0.3 T
Rate of decrease of the magnetic field, \(\frac{d B}{d t}\) = 0.02 T/s
emf developed in the loop is given as
e = \(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\)
where, Φ = Change in flux through the loop area
= AB
∴ e = \(\frac{d(A B)}{d t}=\frac{A d B}{d t}\)
= 16 × 10^-4 × 0.02 =0.32 × 10^-4 V
= 3.2 × 10^-5 V
Resistance of the loop, R = 1.6 Ω
The current induced in the loop is given as
i = \(\frac{e}{R}\)
= \(\frac{0.32 \times 10^{-4}}{1.6}\) = 2 × 10^-5A
Power dissipated in the loop in the form of heat is given as
P = i²R
= (2 × 10^-5)² × 1.6
= 6.4 × 10^-10 W
The source of this heat loss is an external agent, which is responsible for changing the magnetic field with time.

Question 12.
A square loop of side 12 cm with its sides parallel to X and F axes is moved with a velocity of 8 cm s^-1 in the positive x-direction in an environment containing a magnetic field in the positive 2-direction. The field is neither uniform in space nor constant in time. It has a gradient of 10^-3 T cm^-1 along the negative jtr-direction (that is it increases by 10^-3 T cm^-1 as one moves in the negative x-direction), and it is decreasing in time at the rate of 10-3 T s1. Determine the direction and magnitude of the induced current in the loop if its resistance is 4.50 mΩ.
Answer:
Here, a = side of the square loop = 12 cm = 12 × 10^-2 m
\(\vec{v}\) = velocity of loop parallel to x-axis = 8 cms^-1
= 8 × 10^-2 ms^-1.
Let B = variable magnetic field acting away from us ⊥ ar to the XY plane along z axis i. e., plane of paper represented by x.
\(\) = 10^-3 Tcm^-1
= 10^-3 × 10² Tm^-1
= 0.1 Tm^-1
= field gradient along – ve x direction.

\(\frac{d B}{d t}\) = rate of variation with me
= 10^-3 Ts^-1
R = resistance of the loop = 4.5 mΩ = 4.5 × 10^-3 Ω
Let I = induced current = ? and its direction = ?
∴ A = area of loop = a² = (12 × 10^-2)² m² = 144 × 10^-4 m².
The magnetic flux changes (i) due, to the variation of B with time and
(ii) due to motion of the loop in non-uniform \(\vec{B}\).
Thus if Φ be the total magnetic flux of the loop, then Φ is calculated as Area of shaded part = adx
Let dΦ = magnetic flux linked with shaded part = B(x,t)adx

∴ From (3), \(\) = 144 × 10^-7 + 1152 × 10^-7
= 1296 × 10^-7 Wbs^-1
Clearly the two effect add up as these cause a decrease in flux along the + z direction.
∴ If e be the induced e.m.f. produced, then
e = –\(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\) = -1296 × 10^-7 V
= -12.96 × 10^-5 V
∴ e = 12.96 × 10^-5 V
∴ I = \(\frac{e}{R}\) = \(\frac{12.96 \times 10^{-5}}{4.5 \times 10^{-3}}\) 2.88 × 10^-2 A.
The direction of induced current is such as to increase the flux through the loop along +z-direction. Thus if for the observer, the loop moves to the right, the current will be seen to be anti-clockwise.

Question 13.
It is desired to measure the magnitude of field between the poles of a powerful loud speaker magnet. A small fiat search coil of area 2 cm² with 25 closely wound turns, is positioned normal to the field direction, and then quickly snatched out of the field region. Equivalently, one can give it a quick 90° turn to bring its plane parallel to the field direction. The total charge flown in the coil (measured by a ballistic galvanometer connected to coil) is 7.5 mC. The combined resistance of the coil and the galvanometer is 0.50 Q. Estimate the field strength of magnet.
Answer:
Area of the small flat search coil, A = 2cm² = 2 × 10^-4m²
Number of turns on the coil, N = 25
Total charge flown in the coil, Q = 7.5 mC = 7.5 × 10 ^-3 C
Total resistance of the coil and galvanometer, R = 0.50 Ω
Induced current in the coil,
I = \(\frac{\text { Induced emf }(e)}{R}\) ………….. (1)
Induced emf is given us
e = -N\(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\) ……………… (2)
Combining equations (1) and (2), we get


Hence, the field strength of the magnet is 0.75 T.

Question 14.
Figure 6.20 shows a metal rod PQ resting on the smooth rails AB and positioned between the poles of a permanent magnet. The rails, the rod, and the magnetic Held are in three mutual perpendicular directions. A galvanometer G connects the rails through a switch K. Length of the rod = 15 cm, B = 0.50 T, resistance of the closed loop containing the rod = 9.0 mfl. Assume the field to be uniform.

(a) Suppose K is open and the rod is moved with a speed of 12 cm s^-1 in me airection snown. dive me polarity ana magnitude of the induced emf.

(b) Is there an excess charge built up at the ends of the rods when K is open? What if K is closed?

(c) With K open and the rod moving uniformly, there is no net force on the electrons in the rod PQ even though they do experience magnetic force due to the motion of the rod. Explain.

(d) What is the retarding force on the rod when K is closed?

(e) How much power is required (by an external agent) to keep the rod moving at the same speed (= 12 cm s^-1) when K is closed? How much power is required when K is open?

(f) How much power is dissipated as heat in the closed circuit? What is the source of this power?

(g) What is the induced emf in the moving rod if the magnetic field is parallel to the rails instead of being perpendicular?
Answer:
Here, B = 0.50 T
l = length of the rod = 15 cm = 15 × 10^-2 m
R = resistance of the closed loop containing the rod = 9.0 mΩ
= 9 × 10^-3 Ω.

(a) v = speed of the rod = 12 cms^-1 = 12 × 10^-2 ms^-1.
The magnitude of the induced e.m.f. is
E = Blv = 0.50 × 15 × 10^-2 × 12 × 10^-12 = 9 × 10^-3 V
According to Fleming’s left hand rule, the direction of Lorentz force —^ ^ ^
\(\vec{F}\) = -e(\(\vec{V} \times \vec{B}\)) on electrons in PQ is from P to Q. So the end P of the rod will acquire positive charge and Q will acquire negative charge,

(b) Yes. When the switch K is open, the electrons collect at the end Q, so excess charge is built up at the end Q. But when the switch K is closed, the accumulated charge at the end Q is maintained by the continuous flow of current.

(c) This is because the presence of excess charge at the ends P and Q of the rod sets up an electric field \(\vec{E}\). The force due to the electric field (q\(\vec{E}\)) balances the Lorentz magnetic force q(\(\vec{V} \times \vec{B}\)). Hence the net force on the electrons is zero.

(d) When the key K is closed, current flows through the rod. The retarding force experienced by the rod is
F = BIl = B(\(\frac{E}{R}\)) l
where, I = \(\) is the induced current. R
F = \(\frac{0.50 \times 9 \times 10^{-3} \times 15 \times 10^{-2}}{9 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 7.5 × 10^-2 N.

(e) The power required by the external agent against the above retarding force to keep the rod moving uniformly at speed 12 cms^-1 (= 12 × 10^-2 m/s) when K is closed is given by
p = FV = 7. 5 × 10^-2 × 12 × 10^-2
= 90 × 10^-4 W
= 9 × 10^-3 W

(f) Power dissipated as heat is given by
P = I²R = (\(\frac{E}{R}\))² R = \(\frac{E^{2}}{R}\)
= \(\frac{\left(9 \times 10^{-3}\right)^{2}}{9 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 9 × 10^-3 W.
The source of this power is the power provided by the external agent calculated in (e).

Zero. This is because when the magnetic field is parallel to the rails, θ = 0°, so induced e.m.f. E = Blv sinθ = Blv sin 0 = 0. In this situation, the moving rod does not cut the field lines, so there is no change in the magnetic flux, hence E = 0.

Question 15.
An air-cored solenoid with length 30 cm, area of cross-section 25 cm² and number of turns 500, carries a current of 2.5 A. The current is suddenly switched off in a brief time of 10^-3 s. How much is the average back emf induced across the ends of the open switch in the circuit? Ignore the variation in magnetic Held near the ends of the solenoid.
Answer:
Length of the solenoid, l = 30 cm = 0.3 m
Area of cross-section, A = 25 cm² = 25 x 10^-4 m²
Number of turns on the solenoid, N = 500
Current in the solenoid, I = 2.5 A
Current flows for time, t = 10^-3 s
Average back emf, e = \(\frac{d \phi}{d t}\) ……………. (1)
where,
dΦ = NAB ………….. (2)
and B = μ₀ \(\frac{N I}{l}\) …………. (3)
Using equations (2) and (3) in equation (1), we get
e = \(\frac{\mu_{0} N^{2} I A}{l t}\)
\(=\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times(500)^{2} \times 2.5 \times 25 \times 10^{-4}}{0.3 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 6.5 V
Hence, the average back emf induced in the solenoid is 6.5 V.

Question 16.
(a) Obtain an expression for the mutual inductance between a long straight wire and a square loop of side a as shown in Figure 6.21.

(b) Now assume that the straight wire carries a current of 50 A and the loop is moved to the right with a constant velocity, v = 10 m/s.
Calculate the induced emf in the loop at the instant when x = 0.2 m.
Take a = 0.1 m and assume that the loop has a large resistance.
Answer:
(a) Take a small element dy in the loop at a distance y from the long straight wire (as shown in the given figure).
Magnetic flux associated with element dy, dΦ = BdA

= where,
dA = Area of element dy = a dy
B = Magnetic field at distance y = \(\frac{\mu_{0} I}{2 \pi y}\)
I = Current in the wire

Question 17.
A line charge λ per unit length is lodged uniformly onto the rim of a wheel of mass M and radius R. The wheel has light non-conducting spokes and is free to rotate without friction about its axis as shown in Fig. 6.22. A uniform magnetic field extends over a circular region within the rim. It is given by,
B = -Bk (r ≤ a; a < R)
= 0 (otherwise)
What is the angular velocity of the wheel after the field is suddenly switched off?

Answer:
Let ω be the angular velocity of the wheel of mass M and radius R.
Let e = Induced e.m.f. produced.
The rotational K.E. of the rotating wheel = \(\frac{1}{2}\) Iω² ………… (1)
where, I = Moment of inertia of wheel
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) MR² …………… (2)

or Work done = eQ
Applying the work energy theorem, we get
Rotational K.E. = Work done
or RotationalK.E. = Q × e …………… (3)
We know that the e.m.f. of a rod rotating in a uniform magnetic field is
given by \(\frac{1}{2}\) Bωa² , since here the magnetic field is changing, we assume the average over the time span and thus average value of e.m.f. is given by

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physics Book Solutions Chapter 10 Wave Optics Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physics Chapter 10 Wave Optics

PSEB 12th Class Physics Guide Wave Optics Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Monochromatic light of wavelength 589 nm is incident from air on a water surface. What are the wavelength, frequency and speed of (a) reflected, and (b) refracted light? The Refractive index of water is 1.33.
Answer:
Wavelength of incident monochromatic light, λ = 589 nm = 589 x 10^-9 m
Speed of light in air, c = 3 x 10⁸ m/s
Refractive index of water, µ = 1.33

(a) The ray will reflect back in the same medium as that of the incident ray. Hence, the wavelength, speed and frequency of the reflected ray will be the same as that of the incident ray.
Frequency of light is given by the relation,
v = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{589 \times 10^{-9}}\)
= 5.09 x 10¹⁴ Hz
Hence, the speed, frequency, and wavelength of the reflected light are 3 x 10⁸ m/s, 5.09 x 10¹⁴ Hz, and 589 nm respectively.

(b) Frequency of light does not depend on the property of the medium in which it is travelling. Hence, the frequency of the refracted ray in water will be equal to the frequency of the incident or reflected light in air.
Refracted frequency, v = 5.09 x 10¹⁴ Hz
Speed of light in water is related to the refractive index of water as
v_w = \(\frac{c}{\mu}\)
v_w = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{1.33} \) = 2.26 x 10⁸ m/s
Wavelength of light in water is given by the relation,
λ = \(\frac{v_{w}}{v}=\frac{2.26 \times 10^{8}}{5.09 \times 10^{14}}\)
= 444.007 x 10^-9 m
= 444.01 nm
Hence, the speed, frequency and wavelength of refracted light are 2.26 x 10⁸ m/s, 5.09 x 10¹⁴ Hz
and 444.01 nm respectively.

Question 2.
What is the shape of the wavefront in each of the following cases:
(a) Light diverging from a point source. ;
(b) Light emerging out of a convex lens when a point source is placed at its focus.
(c) The portion of the wavefront of light from a distant star intercepted hy the Earth.
Answer:
(a) The shape of the wavefront in case of a light diverging from a point source is spherical. The wavefront emanating from a point source is shown in the given figure

(b) The shape of the wavefront in case of a light emerging out of a convex lens when a point source is placed at its focus is a plane or a parallel grid. This is shown in the given figure

(c) The portion of the wavefront of light from a distant star intercepted by the Earth is a plane.

Question 3.
(a) The refractive index of glass is 1.5. What is the speed of light in glass? (Speed of light in vacuum is 3.0x 10⁸ ms^-1). Is the speed of light in glass independent of the colour of light? If not, which of the two colours red and violet travels slower in a glass prism?
Answer:
(a) Refractive index of glass, µ = 1.5
Speed of light, c = 3 x 10⁸ m/s
Speed of light in glass is given by the relation,
v = \(\frac{c}{\mu}=\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{1.5} \) = 2 x 10⁸ m/s
Hence, the speed of light in glass is 2 x 10⁸ m/s.

(b) The speed of light in glass is not independent of the colour of light.
The refractive index of a violet component of white light is greater than the refractive index of a red component. Hence, the speed of violet light is less than the speed of red light in glass. Hence, violet light travels slower than red light in a glass prism.

Question 4.
In a Young’s double-slit experiment, the slits are separated by 0.28 mm and the screen is placed 1.4 m away. The distance between the central bright fringe and the fourth bright fringe is measured to be 1.2 cm. Determine the wavelength of light used in the experiment.
Answer:
Distance between the slits, d = 0.28 mm = 0.28 x 10^-3 m
Distance between the slits and the screen, D = 1.4m
Distance between the central fringe and the fourth (n = 4) fringe, u = 1.2 cm = 1.2 x 10^-2 m
In case of a constructive interference, we have the ‘relation for the distance between the two fringes as
u = \(n \lambda \frac{D}{d}\)

where, n = order of fringes = 4 = 4λ= wavelength of light used
∴ λ = \(\frac{u d}{n D}\)
= \(\frac{1.2 \times 10^{-2} \times 0.28 \times 10^{-3}}{4 \times 1.4}\)
= 6 x 10^-7 = 600 nm
Hence, the wavelength of the light is 600 nm.

Question 5.
In Young’s double-slit experiment using monochromatic light of wavelength λ, the intensity of light at a point on the screen where path difference is λ is K units. What is the intensity of light at a point where path difference is λ / 3?
Answer:
Here, I =K when path difference = λ
I’ = ? when path difference = \(\frac{\lambda}{3}\)
We know that the intensity I is given by
I = 2I₀(1 + cosΦ) ………………………….. (1)
When Φ = phase difference

When path difference is λ, let Φ be the phase difference.
∴ From relation,
Φ’ = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\) x, we get
Φ’ = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \lambda\) = 2π
∴From eqn.(1),
K = 2I₀ (1+ cos 2π) (∵ cos 2π =1)
= 2I₀(1+1)
or K = 4I₀
or I₀ = \(\frac{K}{4}\) ……………………………… (2)
Let Φ, be the phase difference for a path difference \(\frac{\lambda}{3}\)
∴ Φ₁ = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \times \frac{\lambda}{3}\)
= \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\)
∴ I’ = 2I₀(1+cosΦ₁)

Question 6.
A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths, 650 mn and 520 nm, is used to obtain interference fringes in a Young’s double-slit experiment.
(a) Find the distance of the third bright fringe on the screen from the central maximum for wavelength 650 nm.
(b) What is the least distance from the central maximum where the bright fringes due to both the wavelengths coincide?
Answer:
First wavelength of the light beam, λ₁ = 650 nm
Second wavelength of the light beam, λ₂ = 520 nm
Distance of the slits from the screen = D
Distance between the two slits = d
(a) Distance of the n^th bright fringe on the screen from the central maximum is given by the relation,
x = nλ₁\(\left(\frac{D}{d}\right)\)
For third bright fringe, n = 3
∴ x = 3x 650\(\left(\frac{D}{d}\right)\) = 1950\(\left(\frac{D}{d}\right)\) nm

(b) Let the n^th bright fringe due to wavelength λ₂ and (n – 1)^th bright fringe due to wavelength λ₁ coincide on the screen. We can equate the conditions for bright fringes as nλ₂ = (n-1)λ
520 n = 650 n -650
650 = 130 n
∴ n = 5
Hence, the least distance from the central maximum can be obtained by the relation
x = nλ₂\(\left(\frac{D}{d}\right)\) = 5 x 520\(\left(\frac{D}{d}\right)\) = 2600\(\left(\frac{D}{d}\right)\) nm
Note : The value of d and D are not given in the question.

Question 7.
In a double-slit experiment, the angular width of a fringe is found to be 0.2° on a screen placed 1 m away. The wavelength of light used is 600 nm. What will be the angular width of the fringe if the entire experimental apparatus is immersed in water? Take refractive index of water to be 4/ 3.
Answer:
Distance of the screen from the slits, D = 1 m
The wavelength of light used, λ₁ = 600 nm
Angular width of the fringe in air, θ₁=0.2°
Angular width of the fringe in water = θ₂
Refractive index of water, µ = \(\frac{4}{3}\)
Refractive index is related to angular width as

Therefore, the angular width of the fringe in water will reduce to 0.15°.

Question 8.
What is the Brewster angle for air to glass transition? (Refractive index of glass = 1.5)
Answer:
Refractive index of glass, µ = 1.5
Brewster angle = θ
Brewster angle is related to refractive index as
tanθ = µ
θ= tan^-1 (1.5)=56.31°
Therefore, the Brewster angle for air to glass transition is 56.3 1°.

Question 9.
Light of wavelength 5000 A falls on a plane reflecting surface. What are the wavelength and frequency of the reflected light? For what angle of incidence is the reflected ray normal to the incident ray?
Answer:
Wavelength of incident light, λ = 5000 Å = 5000 x 10^-10 m
Speed of light, c =3 x 10⁸ m
Frequency of incident light is given by the relation,
v = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{5000 \times 10^{-10}}\) = 6 x 10¹⁰ Hz

The wavelength and frequency of incident light is the same as that of reflected ray. Hence, the wavelength of reflected light is 5000 Å and its frequency is 6 x 10¹⁴ Hz. When reflected ray is normal to incident ray, the sum of the angle of incidence, ∠i and angle of reflection, ∠r is 90°.

According to the law of reflection, the angle of incidence is always equal to the angle of reflection. Hence, we can write the sum as
∠i + ∠r =90
∠i + ∠i=90
∠i = \( \frac{90}{2}\) = 45°
Therefore, the angle of incidence for the given condition is 45°.

Question 10.
Estimate the distance for which ray optics is a good approximation for an aperture of 4 mm and wavelength 400 nm.
Answer:
Fresnel’s distance (Z_F) is the distance for which the ray optics is a good approximation. It is given by the relation,
Z_F = \(\frac{a^{2}}{\lambda}\)
where,
aperture width, a = 4 mm = 4 x 10^-3m
wavelength of light, λ = 400 nm = 400 x 10^-9 m
Z_F = \(\frac{\left(4 \times 10^{-3}\right)^{2}}{400 \times 10^{-9}}\) = 40 m
Therefore, the distance for which the ray optics is a good approximation is 40 m.

Additional Exercises

Question 11.
The 6563 Å H_α line emitted by hydrogen in a star is found to be red-shifted by 15 Å. Estimate the speed with which the star is receding from the Earth.
Answer:
Wavelength of H_α line emitted by hydrogen, λ = 6563 Å
= 6563 x 10^-10 m.
Star’s red-shift, (λ’ – λ) = 15 Å = 15 x 10^-10 m
Speed of light, c = 3 x 10⁸ m/s
Let the velocity of the star receding away from the Earth be v.
The redshift is related with velocity as

Therefore, the speed with which the star is receding away from the Earth is 6.87 x10⁵ m/s.

Question 12.
Explain how corpuscular theory predicts the speed of light in a medium, say, water, to be greater than the speed of light in vacuum. Is the prediction confirmed by experimental determination of the speed of light in water? If not, which alternative picture of light is consistent with experiment?
Answer:
According to Newton’s corpuscular theory of light, when light corpuscles strike the interface of two media from a rarer (air) to a denser (water) medium, the particles experience forces of attraction normal to the surface. Hence, the normal component of velocity increases while the component along the surface remains unchanged.
Hence, we can write the expression
c sin i = v sin r …………………………… (1)
where i = Angle of incidence
r = Angle of reflection
c = Velocity of light in air
v = Velocity of light in water

We have the relation for a relative refractive index of water with respect to air as
μ = \(\frac{v}{c}\)
Hence, equation (1) reduces to
\(\frac{v}{c}=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) = μ
But, μ > 1
Hence, it can.be inferred from equation (2) that v > c. This is not possible since this prediction is opposite to the experimental results of c > v. The wave picture of light is consistent with the experimental results.

Question 13.
You have learnt in the text how Huygen’s principle leads to the laws of reflection and refraction. Use the same principle to deduce directly that a point object placed in front of a plane mirror produces a virtual image whose distance from the mirror is equal to the object’s distance from the mirror.
Answer:
Let an object at 0 be placed in front of a plane mirror MO’ at a distance r (as shown in the given figure).

A circle is drawn from the centre (0) such that it just touches the plane mirror at point 0′. According to Huygen’s principle, XY is the wavefront of incident light. If the mirror is absent, then a similar wavefront X’ Y’ (as XT) would form behind 0′ at distance r (as shown in the given figure).

X’ Y’ can be considered as a virtual reflected ray for the plane mirror. Hence, a point object placed in front of the plane mirror produces a virtual image whose distance from the mirror is equal to the object distance (r).

Question 14.
Let us list some of the factors, which could possibly influence the speed of wave propagation :
(i) nature of the source.
(ii) direction of propagation.
(iii) motion of the source and/or observer.
(iv) wavelength.
(v) intensity of the wave.
On which of these factors, if any, does
(a) the speed of light in vacuum,
(b) the speed of light in a medium (say, glass Or water), depend?
Answer:
(a) The speed of light in a vacuum i. e., 3 x 10⁸ m/s (approximately) is a universal constant. It is not affected by the motion of the source, the observer, or both. Hence, the given factor does not affect, the speed of light in a vacuum.
(b) Out of the listed factors, the speed of light in a medium depends on the wavelength of light in that medium.

Question 15.
For sound waves, the Doppler formula for frequency shift differs slightly between the two situations : (i) source at rest; observer moving, and (ii) source moving; observer at rest. The exact Doppler formulas for the case of light waves in a vacuum are, however, strictly identical for these situations. Explain why this should be so. Would you expect the formulas to be strictly identical for the two situations in the case of light travelling in a medium?
Answer:
No, sound waves can propagate only through a medium. The two given situations are not scientifically identical because the motion of an observer relative to a medium is different in the two situations. Hence, the Doppler formulas for the two situations cannot be the same.

In the case of light waves, sound can travel in a vacuum. In a vacuum, the above two cases are identical because the speed of light is independent of the motion of the observer and the motion of the source. When light travels in a medium, the above two cases are not identical because the speed of light depends on the wavelength of the medium.

Question 16.
In a double-slit experiment using light of wavelength 600 nm, the angular width of a fringe formed on a distant screen is 0.1°. What is the spacing between the two slits?
Answer:
Wavelength of light used, λ = 600 nm = 600 x 10^-9 m
Angular width of fringe, θ = 0.1° = 0.1 x \(\frac{\pi}{180}=\frac{3.14}{1800}\)rad
Angular width of a fringe is related to slit spacing (d) as
θ = \(\frac{\lambda}{d}\)

Therefore, the spacing between the two slits is 3.44 x 10^-4 m.

Question 17.
Answer the following questions:
(a) In a single slit diffraction experiment, the width of the slit is made double the original width. How does this affect the size and intensity of the central diffraction band?
(b) In what way is diffraction from each slit related to the interference pattern in a double-slit experiment?
(c) When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from a distant source, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the shadow of the obstacle. Explain why?
(d) Two students are separated by a 7 m partition wall in a room 10 m high. If both light and sound waves can bend around obstacles, how is it that the? students are unable to see each other even though they can converse easily.
(e) Ray optics is based on the assumption that light travels in a straight line. Diffraction effects (observed when light propagates through small apertures/slits or around small obstacles) disprove this assumption. Yet the ray optics assumption is so commonly used in an understanding of location and several other properties of images in optic instruments. What is the justification?
Answer:
(a) In a single slit diffraction experiment, if the width of the slit is made double the original width, then the size of the central diffraction band reduces to half and the intensity of the central diffraction band increase up to four times.

(b) The interference pattern in a double-slit experiment is modulated by diffraction from each slit. The pattern is the result of the interference of the diffracted wave from each slit.

(c) When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from a distant source, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the shadow of the obstacle. This is because light waves are diffracted from the edge of the circular obstacle, which interferes constructively at the centre of the shadow. This constructive interference produces a bright spot.

(d) Bending of waves by obstacles by a large angle is possible when the size of the obstacle is comparable to the wavelength of the waves. On the one hand, the wavelength of the light waves is too small in comparison to the size of the obstacle. Thus, the diffraction angle will be very small. Hence, the students are unable to see each other. On the other hand, the size of the wall is comparable to the wavelength of the sound waves. Thus, the bending of the waves takes place at a large angle. Hence, the students are able to hear each other.

(e) The justification is that in ordinary optical instruments, the size of the aperture involved is much larger than the wavelength of the light used.

Question 18.
Two towers on top of two hills are 40 km apart. The line joining them passes 50 m above a hill halfway between the towers. What is the longest wavelength of radio waves, which can be sent between the towers without appreciable diffraction effects?
Answer:
Distance between the towers, d = 40 km
Height of the line joining the hills, d = 50 m
Thus, the radial spread of the radio waves should not exceed 50 km.
Since the hill is located halfway between the towers, Fresnel’s distance can be obtained as
Z_P = 20 km = 20 x 10³m
Aperture can be taken as
a = d= 50 m

Fresnel’s distance is given by the relation,
Z_p = \(\frac{a^{2}}{\lambda}\)
where, λ = wavelength of radio waves
∴ λ = \(\frac{a^{2}}{Z_{P}}\)
= \(\frac{(50)^{2}}{20 \times 10^{3}}\) = 1250 x 10^-4 = 0.1250 m
= 12.5 cm
Therefore, the wavelength of the radio waves is 12.5 cm.

Question 19.
A parallel beam of light of wavelength 500 nm falls on a narrow slit and the resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 1 m away. It is observed that the first minimum is at a distance of 2.5 mm from the centre of the screen. Find the width of the slit.
Answer:
Wavelength of light beam, λ = 500 nm = 500 x 10^-9 m
Distance of the screen from the slit, D=1m
For first minima, n = 1
Distance between the slits = d
Distance of the first minimum from the centre of the screen can be obtained as
x = 2.5mm = 2.5 x 10^-3 m
It is related to the order of minima as

Therefore, the width of the slits is 0.2 mm.

Question 20.
Answer the following questions :
(a) When a low flying aircraft passes overhead, we sometimes notice a slight shaking of the picture on our TV screen. Suggest a possible explanation.
(b) As you have learnt in the text, the principle of linear superposition of wave displacement is basic to understanding intensity distributions in diffraction and interference patterns. What is the justification of this principle?
Answer:
(a) Weak radar signals sent by a low flying aircraft can interfere with the TV signals received by the antenna. As a result, the TV signals may get distorted. Hence, when a low flying aircraft passes overhead, we sometimes notice a slight shaking of the picture on our TV screen.

(b) The principle of linear superposition of wave displacement is essential to our understanding of intensity distributions and interference patterns. This is because superposition follows from the linear character of a differential equation that governs wave motion. If y₁ and y₂ are the solutions of the second-order wave equation, then any linear combination of y± and y2 will also be the solution of the wave equation.

Question 21.
In deriving the single slit diffraction pattern, it was stated that the intensity is zero at angles of n λ/a. Justify this by suitably dividing the slit to bring out the cancellation.
Answer:
Consider that a single slit of width d is divided into n smaller slits.
∴ Width of each slit, d’ = \(\frac{d}{n}\)
Angle of diffraction is given by the relation,
θ = \(\frac{\frac{d}{d^{\prime}} \lambda}{d}=\frac{\lambda}{d^{\prime}} \)
Now, each of these infinitesimally small slit sends zero intensity in direction θ. Hence, the combination of these slits will give zero intensity.

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physics Book Solutions Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physics Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter

PSEB 12th Class Physics Guide Magnetism and Matter Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Answer the following questions regarding earth’s magnetism:
(a) A vector needs three quantities for its specification. Name the three independent quantities conventionally used to specify the earth’s magnetic field.

(b) The angle of dip at a location in southern India is about 18°
Would you expect a greater or smaller dip angle in Britain?

(c) If you made a map of magnetic field lines at Melbourne in Australia, would the lines seem to go into the ground or come out of the ground?

(d) In which direction would a compass free to move in the vertical plane point to, if located right on the geomagnetic north or south pole?

(e) The earth’s field, it is claimed, roughly approximates the field due to a dipole of magnetic moment 8 × 10²² JT^-1 located at its centre. Check the order of magnitude of this number in some way.

(f) Geologists claim that besides the main magnetic N-S poles, there are several local poles on the earth’s surface oriented in different directions. How is such a thing possible at all?
Answer:
(a) The three independent quantities conventionally used for specifying earth’s magnetic field are magnetic declination, angle of dip and horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field.

(b) The angle of dip at a point depends on how far the point is located with respect to the North Pole or the South Pole. The angle of dip would be greater in Britain (it is about 70°) than in southern India because the location of Britain on the globe is closer to the magnetic North Pole.

(c) It is hypothetically considered that a huge bar magnet is dipped inside earth with its North Pole near the geographic South Pole and its South Pole near the geographic North Pole.

Magnetic field lines emanate from a magnetic North Pole and terminate at a magnetic South Pole. Hence, in a map depicting earth’s magnetic field lines, the field lines at Melbourne, Australia would seem to come out of the ground.

(d) If a compass is located on the geomagnetic North Pole or South Pole, then the compass will be free to move in the horizontal plane while earth’s field is exactly vertical to the magnetic poles. In such a case, the compass can point in any direction.

(e) Magnetic moment, M = 8 × 10²² JT^-1
Radius of earth, r = 6.4 × 10⁶ m
Magnetic field strength, B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} M}{4 \pi r^{3}}\)
∴ B = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 8 \times 10^{22}}{4 \pi \times\left(6.4 \times 10^{6}\right)^{3}}\) = 0.3G
This quantity is of the order of magnitude of the observed field on earth.

(f) Yes, there are several local poles on earth’s surface oriented in different directions. A magnetised mineral deposit is an example of a local N-S pole.

Question 2.
Answer the following questions :
(a) The earth’s magnetic field varies from point to point in space. Does it also change with time? If so, on what time scale does it change appreciably?

(b) The earth’s core is known to contain iron. Yet geologists do not regard this as a source of the earth’s magnetism. Why?

(c) The charged currents in the outer conducting regions of the earth’s core are thought to be responsible for earth’s magnetism. What might be the ’battery’ (i.e., the source of energy) to sustain these currents?

(d) The earth may have even reversed the direction of its field several times during its history of 4 to 5 billion years. How can geologists know about the earth’s field in such distant past?

(e) The earth’s field departs from its dipole shape substantially at large distances (greater than about 30,000 km). What agencies may be responsible for this distortion?

(f) Interstellar space has an extremely weak magnetic field of the order of 10^-12 T. Can such a weak field he of any significant consequence? Explain.
[Note: Exercise 5.2 is meant mainly to arouse your curiosity. Answers to some questions above are tentative or unknown. Brief answers wherever possible are given at the end. For details, you should consult a good text on geomagnetism.]
Answer:
(a) Earth’s magnetic field changes with time. It takes a few hundred years to change by an appreciable amount. The variation in earth’s magnetic field with the time cannot be neglected.

(b) Earth’s core contains molten iron. This form of iron is not ferromagnetic. Hence, this is not considered as a source of earth’s magnetism.

(c) The radioactivity in earth’s interior is the source of energy that sustains the currents in the outer conducting regions of earth’s core. These charged currents are considered to be responsible for earth’s magnetism.

(d) Earth reversed the direction of its field several times during its history of 4 to 5 billion years. These magnetic fields got weakly recorded in rocks during their solidification. One can get clues about the geomagnetic history from the analysis of this rock magnetism.

(e) Earth’s field departs from its dipole shape substantially at large distances (greater than about 30,000 km) because of the presence of the ionosphere. In this region, earth’s field gets modified because of the field of single ions. While in motion, these ions produce the magnetic field associated with them.

(f) An extremely weak magnetic field can bend charged particles moving in a circle. This may not be noticeable for a large radius path. With reference to the gigantic interstellar space, the deflection can affect the passage of charged particles.

Question 3.
A short bar magnet placed with its axis at 30° with a uniform external magnetic field of 0.25 T experiences a torque of magnitude equal to 4.5 × 10^-2 J. What is the magnitude of magnetic moment of the magnet?
Answer:
Magnetic field strength, B = 0.25 T
Torque on the bar magnet, τ = 4.5 × 10^-2J
Angle between the bar magnet and the external magnetic field, θ = 30°
Torque is related to magnetic moment (M) as
τ = MB sinθ
∴ M = \(\frac{\tau}{B \sin \theta}\)
= \(\frac{4.5 \times 10^{-2}}{0.25 \times \sin 30^{\circ}}\)
\(\frac{4.5 \times 10^{-2} \times 2}{0.25 \times 1}\)
(∵ sin30° = \(\frac{1}{2}\))
= 0.36 JT^-1
Hence, the magnetic moment of the magnet is 0.36 JT^-1.

Question 4.
A short bar magnet of magnetic moment m = 0.32 JT^-1 is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.15 T. If the bar is free to rotate in the plane of the field, which orientation would correspond to its (a) stable, and (b) unstable equilibrium? What is the potential energy of the magnet in each case?
Answer:
Given, M = 0.32 JT^-1, B = 0.15T,U = ?
(a) Stable Equilibrium: The magnetic moment should be parallel to the magnetic field. In this position, the potential energy is
U = -MB cos θ =0.32 × 0.15 × 1
= -0.048 J or-4.8 × 10^-2 J\

(b) Unstable Equilibrium: The magnetic moment should be antiparallel to the magnetic field. In this position, the potential energy is
U = -MBcosθ = 0.32 × 0.15 × (-1)
= +0.048 J or + 4.8 × 10^-2 J

Question 5.
A closely wound solenoid of 800 turns and area of cross-section 2.5 × 10^-4 m² carries a current of 3.0 A. Explain the sense in which the solenoid acts like a bar magnet. What is its associated magnetic moment?
Answer:
Solenoid acts as a bar magnet, its magnetic moment is along the axis of the solenoid, the direction determined by the sense of flow of current. The magnetic moment of a current carrying loop having N turns
= NIA = 800 × 3 × 2.5 × 10^-4
= 6 × 10^-1
= 0.60 A-m²
= 0.60 JT^-1

Question 6.
If the solenoid in Exercise 5.5 is free to turn about the vertical direction and a uniform horizontal magnetic field of 0.25 T is applied, what is the magnitude of torque on the solenoid when its axis makes an angle of 30° with the direction of applied field?
Answer:
Magnetic field strength, B = 0.25 T
Magnetic moment, M = 0.6 JT^-1
The angle θ, between the axis of the solenoid and the direction of the applied field is 30°.
Therefore, the torque acting on the solenoid is given as
τ = MB sinθ
= 0.6 × 0.25 × sin30°
= 0.6 × 0.25 × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 0.075 N-m

Question 7.
A bar magnet of magnetic moment 1.5 J T^-1 lies aligned with the direction of a uniform magnetic field of 0.22 T.
(a) What is the amount of work required by an external torque to turn the magnet so as to align its magnetic moment:
(i) normal to the field direction,
(ii) opposite to the field direction?

(b) What is the torque on the magnet in cases (i) and (ii)?
Answer:
Given, M = 1.5 JT^-1,B = 0.22 T,θ₁ =0°

(a) To align the dipole normal to the field direction θ₂ = 90°. Therefore,
W = MB(cosθ₁ – cosθ₂)
W = 1.5 × 0.22(cos0° – cos90°) = 0.33 J
Also, τ = MB sinθ₂
or τ = 1.5 × 0.22sin90° = 0.33 Nm

(b) To align the dipole opposite to the field direction θ₂ = 180°. Therefore,
W =MB(cosθ₁ – cosθ₂)
W = 1.5 × 0.22(cos0° – cos180°) = 0.66 J
Also, τ = MB sinθ₂
or τ = 1.5 × 0.22sinl80° = 0 Nm

Question 8.
A closely wound solenoid of2000 turns and area of cross-section 1.6 × 10^-4 m², carrying a current of 4.0 A, is suspended through its centre allowing it to turn in a horizontal plane.
(a) What is the magnetic moment associated with the solenoid?
(b) What is the force and torque on the solenoid if a uniform horizontal magnetic field of 7.5 × 10^-2 T is set up at an angle of 30° with the axis of the solenoid?
Answer:
Number of turns on the solenoid, N = 2000
Area of cross-section of the solenoid, A = 1.6 × 10^-4 m^{2</sup
Current in the solenoid, I = 4 A}

(a) Let M = magnetic moment of the solenoid.
∴ Using the relation M = NIA, we get
M = 2000 × 4.0 × 1.6 × 10^{-4</sup
= 1.28 JT-1</sup}

The direction of \(\vec{M}\) is along the axis of the solenoid in the direction related to the sense of current according to right-handed screw rule.

(b) Here θ = 30°
\(\vec{B}\) = 7.5 × 10^-2 T
Let F = force on the solenoid = ?
τ = torque on the solenoid = ?
The solenoid behaves as a bar magnet placed in a uniform magnetic field, so the force is
F = m \(\vec{B}\) + (-m \(\vec{B}\)) = 0
where m = pole strength of the magnet.

Using the relation, τ = MB sinθ, we get
τ = 1.28 × 7.5 × 10^-2 × sin30°
= 1.28 × 7.5 × 10^-2 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.048 J
The direction of the torque is such that it tends to align the axis of the solenoid (i. e., magnetic moment vector \(\vec{M}\)) along \(\vec{B}\).

Question 9.
A circular coil of 16 turns and radius 10 cm carrying a current of 0.75 A rests with its plane normal to an external field of magnitude 5.0 × 10^-2 T. The coil is free to turn about an axis in its plane perpendicular to the field direction. When the coil is turned slightly and released, it oscillates about its stable equilibrium with a frequency of 2.0 s^-1. What is the moment of inertia of the coil about its axis of rotation?
Answer:
Number of turns in the circular coil, N = 16
Radius of the coil, r = 10cm = 0.1m
Cross-section of the coil, A = πr² = π × (0.1)² m²
Current in the coil, I = 0.75 A
Magnetic field strength, B = 5.0 × 10^-2 T
Frequency of oscillations of the coil, v = 2.0 s^-1
∴ Magnetic moment, M = NIA = 16 × 0.75 × π × (0.1)² = 0.377 JT^-1
Frequency is given by the relation
v = \(\frac{1}{2 \pi} \sqrt{\frac{M B}{I}}\)
where, I = Moment of inertia of the coil
I = \(\frac{M B}{4 \pi^{2} v^{2}}\) = \(\frac{0.377 \times 5 \times 10^{-2}}{4 \pi^{2} \times(2)^{2}}\)
= 1.19 × 10^-4 kg m²
Hence, the moment of inertia of the coil about its axis of rotation is 1.19 × 10^-4 kg m².

Question 10.
A magnetic needle free to rotate in a vertical plane parallel to the magnetic meridian has its north tip pointing down at 22° with the horizontal. The horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field at the place is known to be 0.35 G. Determine the magnitude of the earth’s magnetic field at the place.
Answer:
Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field, B_H = 0.35 G
Angle made by the needle with the horizontal plane
= Angle of dip = δ = 22°
Earth’s magnetic field strength = B
We can relate B and B_H as
B_H = B cosδ
∴ B = \(\frac{B_{H}}{\cos \delta}=\frac{0.35}{\cos 22^{\circ}}=\frac{0.35}{0.9272}\) = 0.377 G
Hence, the strength of earth’s magnetic field at the given location is 0.377 G.

Question 11.
At a certain location in Africa, a compass points 12° west of the geographic north. The north tip of the magnetic needle of a dip circle placed in the plane of magnetic meridian points 60° above the horizontal. The horizontal component of the earth’s field is measured to he 0.16 G. Specify the direction and magnitude of the earth’s field at the location.
Answer:
Angle of declination, θ = 12°
Angle of dip, δ = 60°
Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field, B_H = 0.16 G
Earth’s magnetic field at the given location = B
We can relate B and B_H as
B_H = B cosδ
B= \(\frac{B_{H}}{\cos \delta}\) = \(=\frac{0.16}{\cos 60^{\circ}}\) = \(\frac{0.16}{\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)}\) = 0.16 × 2 = 0.32 G
Earth’s magnetic field lies in the vertical plane, 12° west of the geographic meridian, making an angle of 60° (Upward) with the horizontal direction. Its magnitude is 0.32 G.

Question 12.
A short bar magnet has a magnetic moment of 0.48 JT^-1. Give the direction and magnitude of the magnetic field produced by the magnet at a distance of 10 cm from the centre of the magnet on (a) the axis, (b) the equatorial lines (normal bisector) of the magnet.
Answer:
Magnetic moment of the bar magnet, M = 0.48 JT^-1
Distance, d = 10cm = 0.1m

(a) The magnetic field at distance d, from the centre of the magnet on the axis is given by the relation,
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 M}{d^{3}}\)
∴ B = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 2 \times 0.48}{4 \pi \times(0.1)^{3}}\)
= 0.96 × 10^-4 T = 0.96 G
The magnetic field is along the S-N direction.

(b) The magnetic field at a distance of 10 cm (i.e., d = 0.1 m) on the equatorial line of the magnet is given as,
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} \times M}{4 \pi \times d^{3}}\)
∴ B = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 0.48}{4 \pi \times(0.1)^{3}}\) = 0.48G
The magnetic field is along the N-S direction.

Question 13.
A short bar magnet placed in a horizontal plane has its axis aligned along the magnetic north-south direction. Null points are found on the axis of the magnet at 14 cm from the centre of the magnet. The earth’s magnetic field at the place is 0.36 G and the angle of dip is zero. What is the total magnetic field on the normal bisector of the magnet at the same distance as the null-point (i. e., 14 cm) from the centre of the magnet? (At null points, field due to a magnet is equal and opposite to the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field.)
Answer:
Distance of the null point from the centre of magnet
d = 14 cm = 0.14 m
The earth’s magnetic field where the angle of dip is zero, is the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field. i.e., H = 0.36 G
Initially, the null points are on the axis of the magnet. We use the formula of magnetic field on axial line (consider that the magnet is short in length).
B₁ = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 m}{d^{3}}\)
This magnetic field is equal to the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field.
i.e., B₁ = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 m}{d^{3}}\) = H ……….(1)
On the equitorial line of magnet at same distance (d) magnetic field due to the magnet
B₂ = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{m}{d^{3}}=\frac{B_{1}}{2}=\frac{H}{2}\) …………….. (2)
The total magnetic field on equitorial line at this point (as given in question)
B = B₂ + H = \(\frac{H}{2}\) + H = \(\frac{3}{2}\)H = \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 0.36 = 0.54G
The direction of magnetic field is in the direction of earth’s field.

Question 14.
If the bar magnet in exercise 5.13 is turned around by 180°, where will the new null points be located?
Answer:
When the bar magnet is turned by 180°, then the null points are obtained on the equitorial line.
So, magnetic field on the equitorial line at distance d’ is
B’ = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{m}{d^{3}}\)
This magnetic field is equal to the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field
B’ = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{m}{d^{3}}\) = H ………… (1)
From Q.No. 13 MISS
Magnetic field B₁ = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 m}{d^{3}}\) = H ………….. (2)
From eqs. (1) and (2), we get

Thus, the null points are located on the equitorial line at a distance of 11.1 cm.

Question 15.
A short bar magnet of magnetic moment 5.25 × 10^-2 JT^-1 is placed with its axis perpendicular to the earth’s field direction. At what distance from the centre of the magnet, the resultant field is inclined at 45° with earth’s field on (a) its normal bisector and (b) its axis. Magnitude of the earth’s field at the place is given to be 0.42 G. Ignore the length of the magnet in comparison to the distances involved.
Answer:
Given, magnetic moment m = 5.25 × 10^-2 J/T
Let the resultant magnetic field is B_net. It makes an angle of 45° with B_e.
∴ B_e = 0.42G =0.42 × 10^-4 T
(a) At normal bisector
Let r is the distance between axial line and point P.
The magnetic field at point P, due to a short magnet
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{m}{r^{3}}\) …………. (1)

The direction of B is along PB, i.e., along N pole to S pole.
According to the vector analysis,

r = 0.05 m
r = 5 cm

(b) When point lies on axial line
Let the resultant magnetic field B_net makes an angle 45° from B_e. The magnetic field on the axial line of the magnet at a distance of r from the centre of magnet
B’ = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 m}{r^{3}}\) (S to N)

Direction of magnetic field is from S to N.
According to the vector analysis,

Question 16.
Answer the following questions :
(a) Why does a paramagnetic sample display greater magnetisation (for the same magnetising field) when cooled?

(b) Why is diamagnetism, in contrast, almost independent of temperature?

(c) If a toroid uses bismuth for its core, will the field in the core be (slightly) greater or (slightly) less than when the core is empty?

(d) Is the permeability of a ferromagnetic material independent of the magnetic field? If not, is it more for lower or higher fields?

(e) Magnetic field lines are always nearly normal to the surface of a ferromagnet at every point. (This fact is analogous to the static electric field lines being normal to the surface of a conductor at every point). Why?

(f) Would the maximum possible magnetisation of a paramagnetic sample be of the same order of magnitude as the magnetisation of a ferromagnet?
Answer:
(a) Owing to the random thermal motion of molecules, the alignments of dipoles get disrupted at high temperatures. On cooling, this disruption is reduced.’Hence, a paramagnetic sample displays greater magnetisation when cooled.

(b) The induced dipole moment in a diamagnetic substance is always opposite to the magnetising field. Hence, the internal motion of the atoms (which is related to the temperature) does not affect the diamagnetism of a material.

(c) Bismuth is a diamagnetic substance. Hence, a toroid with a bismuth core has a magnetic field slightly greater than a toroid whose core is empty.

(d) The permeability of ferromagnetic materials is not independent of the applied magnetic field. It is greater for a lower field and vice versa.

(e) The permeability of ferromagnetic materials is not less than one. It is always greater than one. Hence, magnetic field lines are always nearly normal to the surface of such materials at every point.

(f) The maximum possible magnetisation of a paramagnetic sample can be of the same order of magnitude as the magnetisation of a ferromagnet. This requires high magnetising fields for saturation.

Question 17.
Answer the following questions:
(a) Explain qualitatively on the basis of domain picture the irreversibility in the magnetisation curve of a ferromagnet.

(b) The hysteresis loop of a soft iron piece has a much smaller area than that of a carbon steel piece. If the material is to go through repeated cycles of magnetisation, which piece will dissipate greater heat energy?

(c) ‘A system displaying a hysteresis loop such as a ferromagnet, is a device for storing memory?’ Explain the meaning of this statement.

(d) What kind of ferromagnetic material is used for coating magnetic tapes in a cassette player,’ or for building ‘memory stores’ in a modern computer?

(e) A certain region of space is to be shielded from magnetic fields. Suggest a method.
Answer:
(a) The hysteresis curve (B-H curve) of a ferromagnetic material is shown in the following figure

It can be observed from the given curve that magnetisation persists even when the external field is removed. This reflects the irreversibility of a ferromagnet.

(b) The dissipated heat energy is directly proportional to the area of a hysteresis loop. A carbon steel piede has a greater hysteresis curve area. Hence, it dissipates greater heat energy.

(c) The value of magnetisation is memory or record of hysteresis loop cycles of magnetisation. These bits of information correspond to the cycle of magnetisation. Hysteresis loops can be used for storing information.

(d) Ceramic is used for coating magnetic tapes in cassette players and for building memory stores in modern computers.

(e) A certain region of space can be shielded from magnetic fields if it is – surrounded by soft iron rings. In such arrangements, the magnetic lines are drawn out of the region.

Question 18.
A long straight horizontal cable carries a current of 2.5 A in the direction 10° south of west to 10° north of east. The magnetic meridian of the place happens to be 10° west of the geographic meridian. The earth’s magnetic field at the location is 0.33 G, and the angle of dip is zero. Locate the line of neutral points (ignore the thickness of the cable). (At neutral points, magnetic field due to a current-carrying cable is equal and opposite to the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field.)
Answer:
Given, current in the cable
I = 2.5 A

Magnetic meridian M_NM_S is 10° west of geographical meridian G_NG_S earth’s magnetic field R = 0.33 G
= 0.33 × 10^-4 T ……….. (1)
Angle of dip δ = _S0°
The neutral point is the point where the magnetic field due to the current carrying cable is equal to the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field.
Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field
H = Rcosθ = 0.33 × 10-4 cos0°
= 0.33 × 10^-4 T
Using the formula of magnetic field at distance r due to an infinite long current carrying conductor
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 I}{r}\)
At neutral points,
H = B
0.33 × 10^-4 = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 I}{r}\)
0.33 × 10^-4 = \(\frac{10^{-7} \times 2 \times 2.5}{r}\)
or r = \(\frac{5 \times 10^{-7}}{0.33 \times 10^{-4}}\)
or r = 1.5 × 10^-2 m = 1.5cm
Thus, the line of neutral points is at a distance of 1.5 cm from the cable.

Question 19.
A telephone cable at a place has four long straight horizontal wires carrying a current of 1.0 A in the same direction east to west. The earth’s magnetic field at the place is 0.39 G, and the angle of dip is 35°. The magnetic declination is nearly zero. What are the resultant magnetic fields at points 4.0 cm above and below the cable?
Answer:
Number of horizontal wires in the telephone cable, n = 4
Current in each wire, I = 1.0 A
Earth’s magnetic field at the location, H = 0.39 G = 0.39 × 10^-4 T
Angle of dip at the location, δ = 35°
Angle of declination, θ = 0°
For a point 4 cm below the cable
Distance, r = 4 cm = 0.04 m
The horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field can be written as
H_h, = Hcosδ – B
where,
B = Magnetic field at 4 cm due to current I in the four wires
= 4 × \(\frac{\mu_{0} I}{2 \pi r}\)
μ₀ = 4π × 10^-7 TmA^-1
∴ B = 4 × \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 1}{2 \pi \times 0.04}\)
= 0.2 × 10^-4 T = 0.2G
∴ H_h = 0.39 cos35°- 0.2
= 0.39 × 0.819 – 0.2 ≈ 0.12 G

The vertical component of earth’s magnetic field is given as
H_v = H sinδ
= 0.39 sin35°= 0.22 G
The angle made by the field with its horizontal component is given as
θ = tan^-1 \(\frac{H_{v}}{H_{b}}\)
= tan^-1 \(\frac{0.22}{0.12}\) = 61.39°
The resultant field at the point is given as
H₁ = \(\sqrt{\left(H_{v}\right)^{2}+\left(H_{h}\right)^{2}}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0.22)^{2}+(0.12)^{2}}\) = 0.25 G

For a point 4 cm above the cable
Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field
H_h = Hcosδ +B = 0.39 cos35° + 0.2 = 0.52 G
Vertical component of earth’s magnetic field
H_v = H sinδ
= 0.39 sin35° = 0.22 G
Angle, θ = tan^-1 \(\frac{H_{v}}{H_{h}}\) = tan^-1\(\frac{0.22}{0.52}\) = 22.90
And resultant field
H₂ = \(\sqrt{\left(H_{v}\right)^{2}+\left(H_{h}\right)^{2}}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0.22)^{2}+(0.52)^{2}}\) = 0.56 G

Question 20.
A compass needle free to turn in a horizontal plane is placed at the centre of circular coil of 30 turns and radius 12 cm. The coil is in a vertical plane making an angle of 45° with the magnetic meridian. When the current in the coil is 0.35 A, the needle points west to east.
(a) Determine the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field at the location.
(b) The current in the coil is reversed, and the coil is rotated about its vertical axis by an angle of 90° in the anticlockwise sense looking from above. Predict the direction of the needle. Take the magnetic declination at the places to be zero.
Answer:
Number of turns in the circular coil, N = 30
Radius of the circular coil, r = 12cm = 0.12m
Current in the coil, I = 0.35 A
Angle of dip, δ = 45°

(a) The magnetic field due to current I, at a distance r, is given as
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} 2 \pi N I}{4 \pi r}\)
∴ B = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 2 \pi \times 30 \times 0.35}{4 \pi \times 0.12}\)
= 5.49 × 10^-5 T
The compass needle points from west to east. Hence, the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field is given as
B_H = B sinδ
= 5.49 × 10^-5 sin 45°
= 3.88 × 10^-5 T = 0.388G

(b) When the current in the coil is reversed and the coil is rotated about its vertical axis by an angle of 90°, the needle will reverse its original direction. In this case, the needle will point from east to west.

Question 21.
A magnetic dipole is under the influence of two magnetic fields. The angle between the field directions is 60°, and one of the fields has a magnitude of 1.2 × 10^-2 T. If the dipole comes to stable equilibrium at an angle of 15° with this field, what is the magnitude of the other field?
Answer:
The two fields \(\vec{B}\)₁ and \(\vec{B}\)₂ are shown in the figure

here in which a magnet is placed s.t.
∠NOB = 15°
∠B₁OB₂ = 60°
∴ ∠NOB₂ = 60 – 15 = 45°
B₁ = 1.2 × 10^-2 T
B₂ = ?
Let θ₁ and θ₂ he the inclination of the dipole
with \(\vec{B}\)₁ and \(\vec{B}\)₂ respectively.
∴ θ₁ = 15°,θ₂ = 45°
If τ₁ and τ₂ be the torques on the dipole due to \(\vec{B}\)₁ and \(\vec{B}\)₂ respectively, then
Using the relation,
τ = MB sin θ, we get
τ₁ = MB₁ sinθ₁
and τ₂ = MB₂ sinθ₂
As the dipole is in equilibrium, the torques on the dipole due to \(\vec{B}\)₁ and \(\vec{B}\)₂ are equal and opposite, i. e.,

Question 22.
A monoenergetic (18 keV) electron beam initially in the horizontal direction is subjected to a horizontal magnetic field of 0.40 G normal to the initial direction. Estimate the up or down deflection of the beam over a distance of 30 cm (me = 9.11 × 10^-31 kg). [Note : Data in this exercise are so chosen that the answer will give you an idea of the effect of earth’s magnetic field on the motion of the electron beam from the electron gun to the screen in a TV set.]
Answer:
Here, energy = E = 18 KeV = 18 × 1.6 × 10^-16 J
(∵ 1 KeV=10³eV = 10³ × 1.6 × 10^-19 J)
B = horizontal magnetic field = 0.40 G = 0.40 × 10^-4 J
m = 9.11 × 10^-31 kg, e = 1.6 × 10^-19 C
x = 30 cm = 0.30 m
As the magnetic field is normal to the velocity, the charged particle follows circular path in magnetic field. The centrepetal force \(\frac{m v^{2}}{r}\) required for this purpose is provided by force on electron due to magnetic field i. e., BeV

Question 23.
A sample of paramagnetic salt contains 2.0 × 10²⁴ atomic dipoles each of dipole moment 1.5 × 10^-23 JT^-1. The sample is placed under a homogeneous magnetic field of 0.64 T, and cooled to a temperature of 4.2 K. The degree of magnetic saturation achieved is equal to 15%. What is the total dipole moment of the sample for a magnetic field of 0.98 T and a temperature of 2.8 K? (Assume Curie’s law)
Answer:
Number of atomic dipoles, n = 2.0 × 10²⁴
Dipole moment of each atomic dipole, M = 1.5 × 10^-23 JT^-1
When the magnetic field, B₁ = 0.64 T
The sample is cooled to a temperature, T₁ = 4.2 K
Total dipole moment of the atomic dipole, M_tot = n × M
= 2 × 10²⁴ × 1.5 × 10^-23 = 30 JT^-1
Magnetic saturation is achieved at 15%.
Hence, effective dipole moment, M₁ = \(\frac{15}{100}\) × 30 = 4.5 JT^-1
When the magnetic field, B₂ = 0.98 T
Temperature, T₂ = 2.8 K
Its total dipole moment = M₂
According to Curie’s law, we have the ratio of two magnetic dipoles as
\(\frac{M_{2}}{M_{1}}=\frac{B_{2}}{B_{1}} \times \frac{T_{1}}{T_{2}}\)
∴ M₂ = \(\frac{B_{2} T_{1} M_{1}}{B_{1} T_{2}}\) = \(\frac{0.98 \times 4.2 \times 4.5}{2.8 \times 0.64}\) = 10 336 JT^-1
Therefore, 10.336 J T^-1 is the total dipole moment of the sample for a magnetic field of 0.98 T and a temperature of 2.8 K.

Question 24.
A Rowland ring of mean radius 15 cm has 3500 turns of wire wound on a ferromagnetic core of relative permeability 800. What is the magnetic field B in the core for a magnetising current of 1.2 A?
Answer:
Mean radius of the Rowland ring, r = 15 cm = 0.15 m
Number of turns on the ferromagnetic core, N = 3500
Relative permeability of the core material, μ_r = 800
Magnetising current, I = 1.2 A
The magnetic field is given by the relation
B = \(\frac{\mu_{r} \mu_{0} I N}{2 \pi r}\)
B = \(\frac{800 \times 4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 1.2 \times 3500}{2 \pi \times 0.15}\) = 4.48T
Therefore, the magnetic field in the core is 4.48 T.

Question 25.
The magnetic moment vectors μ_s and μ_l associated with the intrinsic spin angular momentum S and orbital angular momentum l, respectively, of an electron are predicted by quantum theory (and verified experimentally to a high accuracy) to be given by
μ_g = -(e/m)S, μ_l = -(e/2m)l
Which of these relations is in accordance with the result expected classically? Outline the derivation of the classical result.
Answer:
Out of these two relations, \(\overrightarrow{\mu_{l}}=-\frac{e}{2 m} \vec{l}\) is in accordance with classical physics and can be derived as follows

We know that electrons revolving around the nucleus of an atom in circular orbits behave as tiny current loops having angular momentum \(\vec{\imath}\) given in magnitude as
\(\vec{\imath}\) = mvr …………. (1)
where m = mass of an electron
v = its orbital velocity
r = radius of the circular orbit.
or v_r = \(\frac{l}{m}\) …………… (2)

\(\vec{\imath}\) acts along the normal to the plane of the orbit in upward direction. The orbital motion of electron is taken as equivalent to the flow of conventional current I given by

where – ve sign shows that the electron is negatively
charged. The eqn. (3) shows that μ_e and \(\vec{\imath}\) are opposite to each other i. e., antiparallel and both being normal to the plane of the orbit as shown in the figure

∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mu_{l}}=-\frac{e}{2 m} \cdot \vec{l}\)
\(\frac{\mu_{s}}{S}\) in contrast to \(\frac{\mu_{l}}{\vec{l}}\) is \(\frac{e}{m}\) i.e., twice the classically
expected value. This latter result is an outstanding consequence of modern quantum theory and cannot be obtained classically.

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physics Book Solutions Chapter 11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physics Chapter 11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

PSEB 12th Class Physics Guide Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Find the
(a) maximum frequency, and
(b) minimum wavelength of X-rays produced by 30 kV electrons.
Answer:
Potentialoftheelectrons, V=30 kV= 3O x 10³ V=3 x 10⁴ V
Hence, energy of the electrons, E = 3 x 10⁴ eV
where, e = Charge on an electron = 1.6 x 10^-19C
(a) Maximum frequency produced by the X-rays = v
The energy of the electrons is given by the relation
E=eV=hv
where, h = Planck’s constant = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
∴ v = \(\frac{e V}{h} \) (∵ E = eV)
= \(\frac{1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 3 \times 10^{4}}{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}\) = 7.24 x 10¹⁸ Hz
Hence, the maximum frequency of X-rays produced is 7.24 x 10¹⁸ Hz

(b) The minimum wavelength produced by the X-rays is given as
λ = \(\frac{c}{v}\)
= \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{7.24 \times 10^{18}}\)
= 0.414 x 10^-10
= 0.0414 x 10^-9 m
= 0.0414 nm
Hence, the minimum wavelength of X-rays produced is 0.0414 nm.

Question 2.
The work function of caesium metal is 2.14 eV. When light of frequency 6 x 10¹⁴ Hz is incident on the metal surface, photoemission of electrons occurs.
What is the
(a) maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons,
(b) stopping potential, and
(c) maximum speed of the emitted photoelectrons?
Answer:
Work function of caesium metal, Φ₀ = 2.14 eV
Frequency of light, v = 6.0 x 10¹⁴ Hz
The maximum kinetic energy is given by the photoelectric effect as
K = hv- Φ₀
where, h = Planck’s constant = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js .
∴ k = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 6 \times 10^{14}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}-2.14 \)
( ∵ e=1.6 x 10^-19)
= 2.485-2.140 =0.345eV
Hence, the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons is 0.345 eV.

(b) For stopping potential V₀, we can write the equation for kinetic energy
as K=eV₀
∴ V₀ = \(\frac{K}{e}\) (∵ e=1.6×10¹⁹)
= \(\frac{0.345 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) =0.345V
Hence, the stopping potential of the material is 0.345 V.

(c) Maximum speed of the emitted photoelectrons = y
Hence, the relation for kinetic energy can be written as
K = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv²
where, m = mass of an electron = 9.1 x 10^-31 kg
(∴ e=1.6 x 10^-19)
= \(\frac{2 \times 0.345 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31}}\) = 0.1104 x 10¹²
∴ v = 3.323 x 10⁵ m/s = 332.3 km/s
Hence, the maximum speed of the emitted photoelectrons is 332.3 km/s.

Question 3.
The photoelectric cut off voltage n a certain experiment is 1.5 V. What is the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted?
Answer:
Cut-off voltage, V₀ = 1.5 V
Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons
E_K =eV₀ =1.5eV=1.5 x 1.6 x 10^-19J
=2.4 x 10^-19J.

Question 4.
Monochromatic light of wavelength 632.8 mn is produced by a helium-neon laser. The power emitted is 9.42 mW.
(a) Find the energy and momentum of each photon in the light beam,
(b) How many photons per second, on the average, arrive at a target irradiated by this beam? (Assume the beam to have uniform cross-section which is less than the target area), and
(c) How fast does a hydrogen atom have to travel in order to have the same momentum as that of the photon?
Answer:
Wavelength of the monochromatic light, 632.8 nm = 632.8 x 10^-9 m
Power emitted by the laser, P = 9.42 mW = 9.42 x 10^-3 W
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34Js
Speed of light, c=3 x 10⁸ m/s
Mass of a hydrogen atom, m =1.66 x 10^-27 kg
(a) The energy of each photon is given as
E = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{632.8 \times 10^{-9}}\)
= 3.141 x 10^-19

The momentum of each photon is given as
p = \(\frac{h}{\lambda}\)
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{632.8 \times 10^{-9}}=1.047 \times 10^{-27} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1} \)

(b) Number of photons arriving per second, at a target irradiated by the beam = n.
Assume that the beam has a uniform cross-section that is less than the
target area.
Hence, the equation for power can be written as
P=nE
∴ n= \(\frac{P}{E}\)
= \(\frac{9.42 \times 10^{-3}}{3.141 \times 10^{-19}}\) = 3 x 10¹⁶

(c) Momentum of the hydrogen atom is the same as the momentum of the photon, .
p=1.047 x 10²⁷ kgms^-1
Momentum is given as
p = mv
where, v = speed of the hydrogen atom
v = \(\frac{p}{m}\)
= \(=\frac{1.047 \times 10^{-27}}{1.66 \times 10^{-27}}\) = 0.630m/s

Question 5.
The enery flux of sunlight reaching the surface of the earth is 1.388 x 10³ W/m².
How many photons (nearly) per square metre are incident on the Earth per second? Assume that the photons in the sunlight have an average wavelength of 550 rims.
Answer:
Energy flux of sunlight reaching the surface of earth,
Φ = 1.388 x 10³ W/m²
Hence, power of sunlight per square metre, P = 1.388 x 10³W
Speed of light, c = 3 x 10⁸ m/s
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Average wavelength of photons present in sunlight, λ = 550 nm.
=550 x 10^-9m
Number of photons per square metre incident on earth per second = n

Hence, the equation for power can be written as
P = nE
∴ n = \(\frac{P}{E}=\frac{P \lambda}{h c}=\frac{1.388 \times 10^{3} \times 550 \times 10^{-9}}{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}\)
= 3.84 x 10²¹ photons/m²/s
Therefore, every second, 3.84×1021 photons are incident per square metre on earth.

Question 6.
In an experiment on photoelectric effect, the slope of the cut-off voltage versus frequency of incident light is found to be 4.12 x 10^-15 Vs. Calculate the value of Planck’s constant.
Answer:
The slope of the cut-off voltage (V) versus frequency (v) of an incident light is given as
\(\frac{V}{v}\) = 4.12 x 10^-15 Vs
V is related to frequency by the equation
hv = eV

where, e = charge on an electron = 1.6 x 10^-19
h = Planck’s constant
∴ h = e x \(\frac{V}{v}\)
= 1.6 x 10^-19 x 4.12 x 10^-15
= 6.592 x 10^-34 Js
Therefore, the value of Planck’s constant is 6.592 x 10^-34 Js.

Question 7.
A 100 W sodium lamp radiates energy uniformly in all directions. The lamp is located at the centre of a large sphere that absorbs all the sodium light which is incident on it. The wavelength of the sodium light is 589 nm.
(a) What is the energy per photon associated with the sodium light?
(b) At what rate are the photons delivered to the sphere?
Answer:
Power of the sodium lamp,. P = 100 W
Wavelength of the emitted sodium light, λ = 589 nm = 589 x 10⁹ m
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Speed of light, c = 3 x 10⁸ m/s
The energy per photon associated with the sodium light is given as
E= \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)

(b) Number of photons delivered to the sphere = n
The equation for power can be written as
P=nE
∴ n = \(\frac{P}{E}=\frac{100}{3.37 \times 10^{-19}}\) = 2.96 x 10²⁰ photons/s
Therefore, every second, 2.96 x 10²⁰ photons are delivered to the sphere.

Question 8.
The threshold frequency for a certain metal is 3.3 x 10¹⁴ Hz. If light of frequency 8.2 x 10¹⁴ Hz is incident on the metal, predict the cut-off voltage for the photoelectric emission.
Answer:
Threshold frequency of the metal, v₀ = 3.3 x 10¹⁴ Hz
Frequency of light incident on the metal, v = 82 x 10¹⁴ Hz
Charge on’an electron, e = 1.6 x 10^-19 C .
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Cut-off voltage for the photoelectric emission from the metal = V₀
The equation for the cut-off energy is given as
eV₀ = h(v-v₀)
V_o = \(\frac{h\left(v-v_{0}\right)}{e}\)
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-14} \times\left(8.2 \times 10^{14}-3.3 \times 10^{14}\right)}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= 2.0292 V
Therefore, the cut-off voltage for the photoelectric emission is 2.0292 V.

Question 9.
The work function for a certain metal Is 4.2 eV. Will this metal give photoelectric emission for incident radiation of
wavelength 330 nm?
Answer:
The energy of incident radiations
E = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{330 \times 10^{-9}}\) J
= 6.03 x 10^-19 J
= \(\frac{6.03 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)eV = 3.77 eV
The work function of photometal, Φ₀ = 4.2 eV
As energy of incident photon is less than work function, photoemission is not possible.

Question 10.
Light of frequency 7.21 x 10¹⁴ Hz is incident on a metal surface. Electrons with a maximum speed of 6.0 x10s m/s are ejected from the surface. What is the threshold frequency for photoemission of electrons?
Answer:
Frequency of light incident on the metal surface, v = 7.21 x 10¹⁴ Hz
Maximum speed of the electrons, v = 6.0 x 10⁵ m/s
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Mass of an electron, m = 9.1 x 10^-31 kg
For threshold frequency v₀, the relation for kinetic energy is written asFor threshold frequency y0, the relation for kinetic energy is written as
\(\frac{1}{2} m v^{2}\) = h(v-v₀)
v₀ = v – \(\frac{m v^{2}}{2 h}\)

Therefore, the threshold frequency for the photoemission of electrons is 4.738 x 10¹⁴ Hz.

Question 11.
Light of wavelength 488 mn is produced by an argon laser which is used in the photoelectric effect. When light from this spectral line is incident on the emitter, the stopping (cut-off) potential of photoelectrons is 0.38 V. Find the work function of the material from which the emitter is made.
Answer:
Wavelength of light produced by the argon laser,
λ = 488 nm = 488 x 10^-9 m
Stopping potential of the photoelectrons, V₀ = 0.38 V
1 eV=l.6 x 10^-19 J
∴ V₀= \(\frac{0.38}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) eV
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Charge on an electron, e = 1.6 x 10^-19 C
Speed of light, c =3 x 10 m/s
From Einstein’s photoelectric effect, we have the relation involving the work function Φ₀ of the material of the emitter as

Therefore, the material with which the emitter is made has the work function of 2.16 eV.

Question 12.
Calculate the
(a) momentum, and
(b) de Broglie wavelength of the electrons accelerated through a potential difference of 56 V.
Answer:
Potential difference, V = 56 V
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Mass of an electron, m = 9.1 x 10^-31 kg
Charge on an electron, e = 1.6 x 10^-19 C
(a) At equilibrium, the kinetic energy of each electron is equal to the accelerating potential, i.e., we can write the relation for velocity (v) of each electron as

The momentum of each accelerated electron is given as
P = mv
= 9.1 x 10^-31 x 4.44 x 10⁶
= 4.04 x 10^-24 kg m s^-1
Therefore, the momentum of each electron is 4.04 x 10^-24 kg m s^-1.

(b) de Broglie wavelength of an electron accelerating through a potential V is given by the relation

Therefore, the de Broglie wavelength of each electron is 0.1639 nm.

Question 13.
What is the
(a) momentum,
(b) speed, and
(c) de Broglie wavelength of an electron with kinetic energy of 120 eV.
Answer:
Kinetic energy of the electron, E_k = 120 eV
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Mass of an electron, m = 9.1 x 10^-31
Charge on an electron, e = 1.6 x 10^-19 C

(a) For the electron, we can write the relation for kinetic energy as
Ek = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv²
where, v = speed of the electron
∴ v² = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 e E_{k}}{m}}=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 120}{9.1 \times 10^{-31}}}\)
= \(\sqrt{42.198 \times 10^{12}}\) = 6.496 x 10⁶ m/s
Momentum of the electron, p = mv = 9.1 x 10^-31 x 6.496 x 10⁶
=5.91 x 10²⁴ kg ms^-1
Therefore, the momentum of the electron is 5.91 x 10²⁴ kg ms^-1.

Question 14.
The wavelength of light from the spectral emission line of sodium is 589 nm. Find the kinetic energy at which an electron, and a neutron, would have the same de Broglie wavelength.
Answer:
Wavelength of light of sodium line, λ = 589 nm = 589 x 10^-9 m
Mass of an electron, m_e = 9.1 x 10^-31 kg
Mass of a neutron, m_n = 1.66 x 10^-27 kg
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js

(a) For the kinetic energy K, of an electron accelerating with a velocity v, we have the relation
K = \(\frac{1}{2}\) m_ev² ………………………… (1)
We have the relation for de Broglie wavelength as
λ = \(\frac{h}{m_{e} v}\)
∴ v² = \(\frac{h^{2}}{\lambda^{2} m_{e}^{2}}\) ………………………… (2)
Substituting equation (2) in equation (1), we get the relation
K = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{m_{e} h^{2}}{\lambda^{2} m_{e}^{2}}=\frac{h^{2}}{2 \lambda^{2} m_{e}}\) ………….. (3)

Hence, the kinetic energy of the electron is 6.9 x 10^-25 J or 4.31 µeV.

(b) Using equation (3), we can write the relation for the kinetic energy of the neutron as = \(\frac{h^{2}}{2 \lambda^{2} m_{n}}\)
= \(\frac{\left(6.63 \times 10^{-34}\right)^{2}}{2 \times\left(589 \times 10^{-9}\right)^{2} \times 1.66 \times 10^{-27}}\)
= 3.78 x 10^-28
= \(\frac{3.78 \times 10^{-28}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}} \) = 2.36 x 10^-9 eV
= 2.36 neV
Hence, the kinetic energy of the neutron is 3.78 x 10^-28 J or 2.36 neV.

Question 15.
What is the de Broglie wavelength of
(a) a bullet of mass 0.040 kg travelling at the speed of 1.0 km/s,
(b) a ball of mass 0.060 kg moving at a speed of 1.0 m/s, and
(c) a dust particle of mass 1.0 x 10^-9 kg drifting with a speed of 2.2 m/s?
Answer:
(a) Mass of the bullet, m = 0.040 kg
Speed of the bullet, v = 1.0 km/s = 1000 m/s
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
de Broglie wavelength of the bullet is given by the relation
λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{0.040 \times 1000} \) = 1.65 x 10^-35 m

(b) Mass of the ball, m = 0.060 kg
Speed of the ball, v =1.0 m/s
de Brogue wavelength of the ball is given by the relation
λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{0.060 \times 1}\) = 1.1 x 10^-32 m

(c) Mass of the dust particle, m = 1 x 10^-9 kg
Speed of the dust particle, v = 2.2 m/s
de Brogue wavelength of the dust particle is given by the relation
λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{2.2 \times 1 \times 10^{-9}}\) = 3.0 x 10^-25 m.

Question 16.
An electron and a photon each have a wavelength of 1.00 run. Find
(a) their momenta,
(b) the energy of the photon, and
(c) the kinetic energy of electrons.
Answer:
Wavelength of an electron (λe) and a photon (λp),λe = λp = λ = 1 nm
= 1 x 10^-9 m
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js

(a) The momentum of an elementary particle is given by de Broglie relation
λ = \(\frac{h}{p}\)
p = \(\frac{h}{\lambda}\)
It is clear that momentum depends only on the wavelength of the particle. Since the wavelengths of an electron and a photon are equal, both have an equal momentum.
∴ p= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{1 \times 10^{-9}} \) =6.63 x 10^-25 kgms^-1

(b) The energy of a photon is given by the relation
E= \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)
where, speed of light, c =3 x 10⁸ m/s
∴ E = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{1 \times 10^{-9} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= 1243.1 eV = 1.243 keV
Therefore, the energy of the photon is 1.243 keV.

(c) The kinetic energy (K) of an electron having momentum p, is given by the relation
K = \(\frac{1}{2} \frac{p^{2}}{m}\)
where, m = mass of the electron = 9.1 x 10^-31 kg;
p = 6.63 x 10^-25 kgm s^-1

∴ K = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{\left(6.63 \times 10^{-25}\right)^{2}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31}}\) = 2.415 x 10^-19 J
= \(\frac{2.415 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) = 1.51 eV
Hence, the kinetic energy of the electron is 1.51 eV.

Question 17.
(a) For what kinetic energy of a neutron will the associated de Broglie wavelength be 1.40x 10^-10 m?
(b) Also, find the de Brogue wavelength of a neutron, in thermal equilibrium with matter, having an average kinetic energy of (3/2) kT at 300 K.
Answer:
(a) de Brogue wavelength of the neutron, λ =1.40 x 10^-10 m
Mass of a neutron,m_n =1. 66 x 10^-27 kg
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Kinetic energy (K) and velocity ( v) are related as
K = \( \frac{1}{2} m_{n} v^{2}\) ……………………………… (1)
de Brogue wavelength (λ) and velocity (v) are related as
λ= \(\frac{h}{m_{n} v}\) ……………………………….. (2)
Using equation (2) in equation (1), we get


Hence, the kinetic energy of the neutron is 6.75 x 10^-21 J or 4.219 x 10^-2 eV.

(b) Temperature of the neutron, T = 300 K
Boltzmann’s constant, k =1.38 x 10^-23 kg m² s^-2 K^-1
Average kinetic energy of the neutron,
K’ = \(\frac{3}{2} \) kT.
= \(\frac{3}{2} \) x 1.38 x 10^-23 x 300 = 6.21 x 10^-21 J
The relation for the de Broglie wavelength is given as
λ ‘ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 K^{\prime} m_{n}}}\)

where, m_n = 1.66 x 10^-27 kg
h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
K’ = 6.21 x 10^-21 J
∴ λ’ = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2 \times 6.21 \times 10^{-21} \times 1.66 \times 10^{-27}}}\)
=1.46 x 10^-10
m = 0.146 nm
Therefore, the de Broglie wavelength of the neutron is 0.146 nm.

Question 18.
Show that the wavelength cf electromagnetic radiation is equal to the de Broglie wavelength of its quantum (photon).
Answer:
The momentum of a photon having energy (hv) is given as ’
p = \(\frac{h v}{c}=\frac{h}{\lambda}\)
λ = \(\frac{h}{p}\) ………………………….. (1)
where, λ = wavelength of the electromagnetic radiation
c = speed of light
h = Planck’s constant
de Broglie wavelength of the photon is given as
λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)
But p = mv
∴ λ =\(\frac{h}{p}\) ………………………………….. (2)
where, m = mass of the photon
v = velocity of the photon
Hence, it can be inferred from equations (1) and (2) that the wavelength of the electromagnetic radiation is equal to the de Broglie wavelength of the photon.

Question 19.
What is the de Broglie wavelength of a nitrogen molecule in air at 300 K?
Assume that the molecule is moving with the root mean square speed of molecules at this temperature. (Atomic mass of nitrogen = 140076 u)
Answer:
Temperature of the nitrogen molecule, T = 300 K
Atomic mass of nitrogen = 14.0076 u
Hence, mass of the nitrogen molecule, m = 2 x 14.0076 = 28.0152 u
But 1 u = 1.66 x 10^-27 kg
∴ m=28.0152 x 1.66 x 10^-27 kg
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Boltzmann’s constant, k = 1.38 x 10^-23 K^-1
We have the expression that relates mean kinetic energy \(\left(\frac{3}{2} k T\right)\) of the nitrogen molecuLe with the root mean square speed (v_rms) as

Hence, the de Broglie wavelength of the nitrogen molecule is given as
λ = \(\frac{h}{m v_{\text {rms }}}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{3 m k T}}\)
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{3 \times 28.0152 \times 1.66 \times 10^{-27} \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 300}}\)
= 0.028 x 10^-9 m
= 0.028 nm
Therefore, the de Broglie wavelength of the nitrogen molecule is 0.028 nm.

[Additional Exercises]

Question 20.
(a) Estimate the speed with which electrons emitted from a heated emitter of an evacuated tube impinge on the collector maintained at a potential difference of 500 V with respect to the emitter.
Ignore the small initial speeds of the electrons. The specific charge of the electron, i.e., its elm, is given to be 1.76 x 10¹¹ Ckg^-1.
(b) Use the same formula you employ in (a) to obtain electron speed for an collector potential of 10 MV. Do you see what is wrong? In what way is the formula to be modified?
Answer:
(a) Potential difference across the evacuated tube, V = 500 V
Specific charge of the electron, e/m = 1.76 x 10¹¹ C kg^-1
The speed of each emitted electron is given by the relation for kinetic energy as

KE = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv²
Therefore, the speed of each emitted electron is
KE =\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv² = eV
∴ v = \(\left(\frac{2 e V}{m}\right)^{1 / 2}=\left(2 V \times \frac{e}{m}\right)^{1 / 2} \)
= (2x 500 xl.76 x 10¹¹)^1/2
= 1.327 x 10⁷ m/s

(b) Potential of the anode, V = 10 MV = 10 x 10⁶ = 10⁷ V
The speed of each electron is given as
v = \(\left(2 V \frac{e}{m}\right)^{1 / 2}\)
= (2 x 10⁷x 1.76 x 10¹¹)^1/2
= 1.88 x 10⁹ m/s .
This result is wrong because nothing can move faster than light. In the above formula, the expression (mv² / 2) for energy can only be used in the non-relativistic limit, i. e., for v < < c.
For very high speed problems, relativistic equations must be considered for solving them. In the relativistic limit, the total energy is given as E = mc²
where, m = relativistic mass
m₀ = \(\left(1-\frac{v^{2}}{c^{2}}\right)^{1 / 2}\) = mass of the particle at rest
Kinetic energy is given as
K = mc² – m₀c²

Question 21.
(a) A monoenergetic electron beam with electron speed of 5.20x 10⁶ ms^-1 is subject to a magnetic field of 1.30 x 10 ⁴T normal to the beam velocity. What is the radius of the circle traced by the beam, given elm for electron equals 1.76x 10¹¹ C kg^-1
(b) Is the formula you employ in (a) valid for calculating radius of the path of a 20 MeV electron beam? If not, in what way is it modified? [Note: Exercises 11.20 (b) and 11.21 (b) take you to relativistic mechanics which is beyond the scope of this book. They have been inserted here simply to emphasise the point that the formulas you use in part (a) of the exercises are not valid at very high speeds or energies. See answers at the end to know what ‘very high speed or energy’ means.]
Answer:
(a) Speed of the electron, v = 5.20 x 10⁶ m/s
Magnetic field experienced by the electron, B = 1.30 x 10^-4 T
Specific charge of the electron, e/m = 1.76 x 10¹¹ C kg’
where, e = charge on the electron = 1.6 x 10^-19 C
m = mass of the electron = 9.1 x 10^-31 kg
The force exerted on the electron is given as
F = e\(|\vec{v} \times \vec{B}|\)
= evBsinθ
θ = angle between the magnetic field and the beam velocity.

The magnetic field is normal to the direction of beam.
∴ θ = 90°
F = evB ……………………………. (1)
The beam traces a circular path of radius, r. It is the magnetic field, due to its bending nature, that provides the centripetal force \(\left(F=\frac{m v^{2}}{r}\right)\) for the
beam.
Hence, equation (1) reduces to
evB = \(\frac{m v^{2}}{r}\)
∴ r = \(\frac{m v}{e B}=\frac{v}{\left(\frac{e}{m}\right) B}=\frac{5.20 \times 10^{6}}{\left(1.76 \times 10^{11}\right) \times 1.30 \times 10^{-4}}\)
= 0.227 m
= 0.227 x 100 cm = 22.7 cm
Therefore, the radius of the circular path is 22.7 cm.

(b) Energy of the electron beam, E = 20 MeV = 20 x 10⁶ x 1.6 x 10^-19 J
The energy of the electron is given as
E = \(\frac{1}{2} \) mv²
∴ v = \(\left(\frac{2 E}{m}\right)^{1 / 2}\)
= \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 20 \times 10^{6} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31}}}\) = 2.652 x 10⁹ m/s

This result is incorrect because nothing can move faster than light. In the above formula, the expression (mv² / 2) for energy can only be used in the non-relativistic limit, i. e., for v« c.

When very high speeds are concerned, the relativistic domain comes into consideration. In the relativistic domain, mass is given as
m = m₀ \(\left[1-\frac{v^{2}}{c^{2}}\right]^{1 / 2}\)
where, m₀ = mass of the particle at rest

Hence, the radius of the circular path is given as
r = mv/eB = \(\frac{m_{0} v}{e B \sqrt{\frac{c^{2}-v^{2}}{c^{2}}}}\).

Question 22.
An electron gun with its collector at a potential of 100 V fires out electrons in a spherical hulh containing hydrogen gas at low pressure (~ 10^-2 nun of Hg). A magnetic field of 2.83 x 10^-4 T curves the path of the electrons in a circular orbit of radius 12.0 cm. (The path can be viewed because the gas ions in the path focus the beam by attracting electrons, and emitting light by electron capture; this method is known as the ‘fine beam tube’ method). Determine elm from the data.
Answer:
Potential of the anode, V = 100 V
Magnetic field experienced by the electrons, B = 2.83 x 10,sup>-4 T
Radius of the circular orbit r = 12.0 cm = 12.0 x 10^-2 m
Mass of each electron = m
Charge on each electron = e ‘
Velocity of each electron = v

The energy of each electron is equal to its kinetic energy, i. e.,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv² = eV
v² = \(\frac{2 e V}{m}\)
It is the magnetic field, due to its bending nature, that provides the \(\left(F=\frac{m v^{2}}{r}\right) \) for the beam.
Hence, we can write Centripetal force = Magnetic force mv²
\(\frac{m v^{2}}{r}\) = evB
eB = \(\frac{m v}{r}\)
v = \(\frac{e B r}{m}\) ………………………………. (2)
Putting the value of y in equation (1), we get

Therefore, the specific charge ratio (e/ m) is 1.73 x 10¹¹ C kg^-1.

Question 23.
(a) An X-ray tube produces a continuous spectrum of radiation with its short wavelength end at 0.45 A. What is the maximum energy of a photon in the radiation?
(b) From your answer to (a), guess what order of accelerating voltage (for electrons) is required in such a tube?
Answer:
(a) Wavelength produced by the X-ray tube, λ= 0.45Å= 0.45 x 10^-10 m
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Speed of light, c = 3 x 10⁸ m/s
The maximum energy of a photon is given as
E = \(=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{0.45 \times 10^{-10} \times 1.6 \times 10^{19}} \) = 27.6 x 10³ eV = 27.6 keV
Therefore, the maximum energy of the X-ray photon is 27.6 keV.

(b) Accelerating voltage provides energy to the electrons for producing X-rays.
To get an X-ray of 27.6 keV, the incident electrons must possess at least 27.6 keV of kinetic electric energy. Hence, an accelerating voltage of the order of 30 keV is required for producing X-rays.

Question 24.
In an accelerator experiment on high-energy collisions of electrons with positrons, a certain event is interpreted as an annihilation of an electron-positron pair of total energy 10.2 BeV into two y-rays of equal energy. What is the wavelength associated with each γ-ray? (1 BeV = 10⁹ eV)
Answer:
Total energy of two γ-rays
E = 10.2 BeV
= 10.2 x 10⁹ eV
= 10.2 x 10⁹ x 1.6 x 10^-19 J
= 10.2 x 1.6 x 10^-10

Hence, the energy of each γ-ray
E’ = \(\frac{E}{2}\)
= \(\frac{10.2 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-10}}{2}\)
= 8.16 x 10^-10 J
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Speed of light, c = 3 x 10⁸ m/s
Energy is related to wavelength as
E ‘ = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)
∴ λ = \(\frac{h c}{E^{\prime}}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{8.16 \times 10^{-10}}\)
= 2.436 x 10^-16 m
Therefore, the wavelength associated with each γ-ray is 2.436 x 10^-16 m.

Question 25.
Estimating the following two numbers should be interesting. The first number will tell you why radio engineers do not need to worry much about photons. The second number tells you why our eye can never ‘count photons’, even in barely detectable light.
(a) The number of photons emitted per second by a Mediumwave transmitter of 10 kW power, emitting radio waves of wavelength 500 m.
(b) The number of photons entering the pupil of our eye per second corresponding to the minimum intensity of white light that we humans can perceive (~ 10^-10 W m^-2). Take the area of the pupil to be about 0.4 cm², and the average frequency of white light to be about 6 x 10¹⁴ Hz.
Answer:
(a) Power of the medium wave transmitter,
P = 10kW = 10⁴ W = 10⁴ J/s
Hence, the energy emitted by the transmitter per second, E = 10⁴
The wavelength of the radio wave, λ = 500 m
The energy of the wave is given as E₁ = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)
where, h = Planck’s constant = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
c = speed of light = 3 x 10⁸ m/s
∴ E₁ = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{500}\) = 3.96 x 10^-28

Let n be the number of photons emitted by the transmitter.
∴ nE₁ = E
n = \(\frac{E}{E_{1}}\) =\(\frac{10^{4}}{3.96 \times 10^{-28}}\) = 2.525 x 10³¹
≈ 3 x 10³¹
The energy (E₁) of a radio photon is very less, but the number of photons (n) emitted per second in a radio wave is very large. The existence of a minimum quantum of energy can be ignored and the total energy of a radio wave can be treated as being continuous.

(b) Intensity of light perceived by the human eye, I = 10^-10 W m^-2
Area of the pupil, A = 0.4 cm² = 0.4 x 10^-4 m²
Frequency of white light, v = 6 x 10¹⁴ Hz
The energy emitted by a photon is given as
E = hv
where, h = Planck’s constant = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
∴ E = 6.63 x 10^-34 x 6 x 10¹⁴
= 3.96 x 10^-19 J
Let n be the total number of photons falling per second, per unit area of the pupil. The total energy per unit for n falling photons is given as
E = n x 3.96 x 10^-19 Js^-1 m^-2
The energy per unit area per second is the intensity of light.
∴ E = I
n x 3.96 x 10^-19 = 10^-10
n = \(\frac{10^{-10}}{3.96 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= 2.52 x 10⁸ m² s^-1

The total number of photons entering the pupil per second is given as
n_A =n x A
= 2.52 x 10⁸ x 0.4 x 10^-4
= 1.008 x 10⁴ s^-1
This number is not as large as the one found in problem (a), but it is large enough for the human eye to never see the individual photons.

Question 26.
Ultraviolet light of wavelength 2271 Å from a 100 W mercury source irradiates a photo-cell made of molybdenum metal. If the stopping potential is -1.3 V, estimate the work function of the metal. How would the photo-cell respond to a high intensity (~10⁵ Wm^-2) red light of wavelength 6328 Å produced by a He-Ne laser?
Answer:
Wavelength of ultraviolet light, λ = 2271 Å = 2271 x 10^-10 m
Stopping potential of the metal, V₀ = 1.3 V
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Charge on an electron, e = 1.6 x 10^-19 C
Work function of the metal = Φ₀
Frequency of light = v
We have the photo-energy relation from the photoelectric effect as
Φ₀ =hv₀
v₀ = \(\frac{\phi_{0}}{h}\)
= \(\frac{6.64 \times 10^{-19}}{6.63 \times 10^{-34}} \)
= 1.006 x 10¹⁵ Hz = 4.15 eV
Let v₀ be the threshold frequency of the metal.
∴ Φ₀ = hv₀
v₀ = \(\frac{\phi_{0}}{h}\)
= \(\frac{6.64 \times 10^{-19}}{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}\)
= 1.006 x 10¹⁵ Hz

Wavelength of red light, λ_r = 6328 Å = 6328 x 10^-10
∴ Frequency of red light, v_r = \(\frac{c}{\lambda_{r}}=\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{6328 \times 10^{-10}} \)
= 4.74 x 10¹⁴ Hz
Since v₀ > v_r, the photocell will not respond to the red light produced by the laser.

Question 27.
Monochromatic radiation of wavelength 640.2 nm (1 nm = 10^-9 m) from a neon lamp irradiates photosensitive material made of caesium on tungsten. The stopping voltage is measured to be 0.54 V. The source is replaced by an iron source and its 427.2 nm line irradiates the same photo-cell. Predict the new stopping voltage.
Answer:
Wavelength of the monochromatic radiation, λ = 640.2 nm = 640.2 x 10^-9 m
Stopping potential of the neon lamp, V₀ = 0.54 V
Charge on an electron, e = 1.6 x 10^-19 C
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Let Φ₀ the work function and v be the frequency of emitted light. We have the photo-energy relation from the photoelectric effect as

Wavelength of the radiation emitted from an iron source, λ’ = 427.2 nm = 427.2 x 10^-9 m
Let V’₀ be the new stopping potential. Hence, photo-energy is given as
eV’₀ = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda^{\prime}}-\phi_{0}\)

Hence, the new stopping potential is 1.50 eV.

Question 28.
A mercury lamp is a convenient source for studying frequency dependence of photoelectric emission, since it gives a number of spectral lines ranging from the UV to the red end of the visible spectrum. In our experiment with rubidium photo-cell, the following lines from a mercury source were used :
λ₁ =3650 Å,
λ₂ = 4047 Å,
λ₃ =4358 Å,
λ₄ =5461 Å,
λ₅ =6907 Å,
The stopping voltages, respectively, were measured to be :
V₀₁ = 1.28 V,
V₀₂ = 0.95 V,
V₀₃ = 0.74 V,
V₀₄ = 0.16 V,
V₀₅ = 0 V.
Determine the value of Planck’s constant h, the threshold frequency and work function for the material.
[Note: You will notice that to get h from the data, you will need to know e (which you can take to be 1.6 x 10^-19 C). Experiments of this kind on Na, Li, K, etc. were performed by Millikan, who, using his own value of e (from the oil-drop experiment) confirmed Einstein’s photoelectric equation and at the same time gave an independent estimate of the value of h.]
Answer:
Given, the following wavelength from a mercury source were used
λ₁ =3650 Å, = 3650 x 10^-10 m
λ₂ = 4047 Å, = 4047 x 10^-10m
λ₃ =4358 Å, = 4358 x 10^-10 m
λ₄ =5461 Å, = 5461 x 10^-10 m
λ₅ =6907 Å, = 6907 x 10^-10m
The stopping voltages are as follows
V01 =1.28 V,
V02 = 0.95V,
V03 =0.74V,
V04 =0.16 V,
V5 =0

Frequencies corresponding to wavelengths

As we know that
eV₀ = hv-Φ₀
v₀ = \(\frac{h v}{e}-\frac{\phi_{0}}{e}\)

As the graph between V₀ and frequency v is a straight line.
The slope of this graph gives the values of \(\frac{h}{e} \)

(b) Work function, Φ₀ = hv₀
= 6.574 x 10^-34 x 5 x 10¹⁴
= 32.870 x 10^-20J
= 2.05eV.

Question 29.
The work function for the following metals is given: Na: 2.75 eV; K: 2.30 eV; Mo: 4.17 eV; Ni: 5.15 eV.
Which of these metals will not give photoelectric emission for a radiation of wavelength 3300 Å from a He-Cd laser placed 1 m away from the photo-cell? What happens if the laser is brought nearer and placed 50 cm away?
Answer:
Mo and Ni will not show photoelectric emission in both cases.
Wavelength for the radiation, λ – 3300 Å = 3300 x 10^-10 m
Speed of light, c = 3 x 10⁸ m/s
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
The energy of incident radiation is given as
E = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)

= 3.758eV
It can be observed that the energy of the incident radiation is greater than the work function of Na and K only. It is less for Mo and Ni. Hence, Mo and Ni will not show photoelectric emission. If the source of light is brought near the photocells and placed 50 cm away from them, then the intensity of radiation will increase. This does not affect the energy of the radiation. Hence, the result will be the same as before. However, the photoelectrons emitted from Na and K will increase in proportion to intensity.

Question 30.
Light of intensity 10^-5 W m^-2 falls on a sodium photo-cell of surface area 2 cm². Assuming that the top 5 layers of sodium absorb the incident energy, estimate time required for photoelectric emission in the wave-picture of radiation. The work function for the metal is given to be about 2 eV. What is the implication of your answer?
Answer:
Given, intensity of light = 10^-5 W/m²
Area = 2 cm² = 2 x 10^-4 m²
Work function for the metal Φ₀ = 2 eV
Let t be the time.
The effective atomic area of Na = 10^-20 m² and it contains one conduction electron per atom.
Number of conduction electrons in five layers
= \(\frac{5 \times \text { Area of one layer }}{\text { Effective atomic area }}=\frac{5 \times 2 \times 10^{-4}}{10^{-20}}\)
= 10⁷
We know that sodium has one free electron (or conduction electron) per atom.
Incident power on the surface area of photocell
= Incident intensity x Area on the surface area of photocell
= 10^-5 x 2 x 10^-4
= 2 x 10^-9W
The electron present in all the 5 layers of sodium will share the incident energy equally.
Energy absorbed per second per electron,
E = \(\frac{\text { Incident power }}{\text { Number of electrons in five layers }} \)
= \(\frac{2 \times 10^{-9}}{10^{17}}\) = 2 x 10^-26W
Time required for emission by each electron, t = \(\frac{\text { Energy required per electron }}{\text { Energy absorbed per second }} \) = \(\frac{2 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{2 \times 10^{-26}} \) = 1.6 x 10⁷s
which is about 0.5 yr.
The answer obtained implies that the time of emission of electrons is very large and is not agreement with the observed time of emission. There is no time lag between the incidence of light and the emission of photoelectrons. Thus, it is implied that the wave theory cannot be applied in this experiment.

Question 31.
Crystal diffraction experiments can be performed using X-rays, or electrons accelerated through appropriate voltage. Which probe has greater energy? (For quantitative comparison, take the wavelength of the probe equal to 1 Å, which is of the order of interatomic spacing in the lattice) (m_e = 9.11 x 10^-31 kg).
Answer:
An X-ray probe has a greater energy than an electron probe for the same wavelength.
Wavelength of light emitted from the probe, λ = 1 Å = 10^-10 m
Mass of an electron, me = 9.11 x 10^-31 kg
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Charge on an electron, e = 1.6 x 10^-19 C
The kinetic energy of the electron is given as
K = \(\frac{1}{2} m_{n} v^{2}\)
m_nv = \(\sqrt{2 K m_{n}}\)
where, v = velocity of the electron
m_nv = momentum (p) of the electron

According to the de Brogue principle, the de Brogue wavelength is given as

The energy of a photon,

Hence, a photon has a greater energy than an electron for the same wavelength.

Question 32.
(a) Obtain the de Broglie wavelength of a neutron of kinetic energy 150 eV. As you have seen in Exercise 11.31, an electron beam of this energy is suitable for crystal diffraction experiments. Would a neutron beam of the same energy be equally suitable? Explain. (m = 1.675x 10^-27 kg)
(b) Obtain the de Brogue wavelength associated with thermal neutrons at room temperature (27C). Hence, explain why a fast neutron beam needs to be thermalised with the environment before it can be used for neutron diffraction experiments.
Answer:
(a) de Brogue wavelength= 2.327 x 10^-12 m; neutron is not suitable for
the diffraction experiment Kinetic energy of the neutron, K = 150 eV
= 150 x 1.6 X 10^-19
=2.4 x 10^-17 J
Mass of a neutron, m_n = l.675 x 10^-27 kg
The kinetic energy of the neutron is given by the relation
K = \(\frac{1}{2} m_{n} v^{2}\)
m_nv = \(\sqrt{2 K m_{n}}\)
where, y = velocity of the neutron
m_nv = momentum of the neutron

deBroglie wavelength of the neutron is given as
λ = \(\frac{h}{m_{n} v}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 K m_{n}}}\)
It is clear that wavelength is inversely proportional to the square root of mass.
Hence, wavelength decreases with increase in mass and vice versa.
∴ λ = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2 \times 2.4 \times 10^{-17} \times 1.675 \times 10^{-27}}}\)
= 2.327 x 10^-12 m
It is given in the previous problem that the interatomic spacing of a crystal is about 1 Å, i.e., 10^-10 m.
Hence, the interatomic spacing is about a hundred times greater. Hence, a neutron beam of energy 150 eV is not
suitable for diffraction experiments.

(b) de Brogue wavelength =1.447 x 10^-10 m
Room temperature, T = 27°C = 27+ 273 = 300 K
The average kinetic energy of the neutron is given as
E=\(\frac{3}{2}\) kT
where, k = Boltzmann’s constant = 1.38 x10^-23 J mol^-1K^-1
The wavelength of the neutron is given as
λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m_{n} E}}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{3 m_{n} k T}}\)
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{3 \times 1.675 \times 10^{-27} \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 300}}\)
=1.447 x 10^-10 m
This wavelength is comparable to the interatomic spacing of a crystal. Hence, the high energy neutron beam should first be thermalised, before using it for diffraction.

Question 33.
An electron microscope uses electrons accelerated by a voltage of 50 kV. Determine the de Brogue wavelength associated with the electrons, if other factors (such as numerical aperture, etc.) are taken to be roughly the same, how does the resolving power of an electron microscope compare with that of an optical microscope which uses yellow light?
Answer:
Electrons are accelerated by a voltage, V = 50 kV = 50 x 10³ V
Charge on an electron, e 1.6 x 10^-19 C
Mass of an electron, me = 9.11 x 10^-31 kg
Wavelength of yellow light = 5.9 x 10^-7 m

The kinetic energy of the electron is given as
E=eV
=l.6 x 10^-19x 50x 10³
= 8 x 10^-15 J
de Brogue wavelength is given by the relation
λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m_{e} E}}\)
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2 \times 9.11 \times 10^{-31} \times 8 \times 10^{-15}}}\)
= 5.467 x 10^-12 m
This wavelength is nearly 10⁵ times less than the wavelength of yellow light. The resolving power of a microscope is inversely proportional to the wavelength of light used. Thus, the resolving power of an electron microscope is nearly 10⁵ times that of an optical microscope.

Question 34.
The wavelength of a probe is roughly a measure of the size of a structure that it can probe in some detail. The quark structure of protons and neutrons appears at the minute length scale of 10^-15 m or less. This structure was first, probed in early 1970s using high energy electron beams produced by a linear accelerator at Stanford, USA. Guess what might have been the order of energy of these electron beams. (Rest mass energy of electron = 0.511 MeV.)
Answer:
Wavelength of a proton or a neutron, λ ≈ 10^-15 m
Rest mass energy of an electron,
m₀c² =0.511 MeV
= 0.511 x 10⁶ x 1.6 x 10^-19
= 0.8176 x 10^-13 J
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Speed of light, c = 3 x 10⁸ m/s ,

The momentum of a proton or a neutron is given as
p = \(\frac{h}{\lambda}\)
= \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{10^{-15}}\) = 6.6 x 10^-19 kg m/s
The relativistic relation for energy (E) is given as
E² = p²c² +m₀²c⁴
= (6.6x 10^-19 x 3 x 10⁸)² + (0.8176 x 10^-13)²
= 392.04 x 10^-22 +0.6685 x 10^-26
≈ 392.04 x 10^-22
∴ E = 1.98x 10^-10 J
Thus, the electron energy emitted from the accelerator at Stanford, USA might be of the order of 1.24 BeV.

Question 35.
Find the typical de Broglie wavelength associated with a He atom in helium gas at room temperature (27°C) and 1 atm pressure, and compare it with the mean separation between two atoms under these conditions.
Answer:
de Broglie wavelength associated with He atom = 0.7268 x 10^-10 m .
Room temperature, T = 27°C =27 + 273 = 300 K
Atmospheric pressure, P = 1 atm = 1.01 x 10⁵ Pa
Atomic weight of a He atom = 4
Avogadro’s number, N_A = 6.023 x 10²³
Boltzmann’s constant, k = 1.38 x 10^-23 J mol^-1 K^-1

Average energy of a gas at temperature T, is given as
E = \(\frac{3}{2}\) kT
de Broglie wavelength is given by the relation
λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)
where, m = mass of a He atom

We have the ideal gas formula
PV = RT
PV = kNT
∵ \(\frac{V}{N}=\frac{k T}{P}\)
where V = volume of the gas
N = number of moles of the gas
Mean separation between two atoms of the gas is given by the relation
r = \(\left(\frac{V}{N}\right)^{1 / 3}=\left(\frac{k T}{P}\right)^{1 / 3}=\left[\frac{1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 300}{1.01 \times 10^{5}}\right]^{1 / 3}\)
= 3.35 x 10^-9 m
Hence, the mean separation between the atoms is much greater than the de Broglie wavelength.

Question 36.
Compute the typical de Broglie wavelength of an electron in a metal at 2 7° C and compare it with the mean separation between two electrons in a metal which is given to be about 2 x 10¹⁰ m. [Note: Exercises 11.35 and 11.36 reveal that while the wave-packets associated with gaseous molecules under ordinary conditions are non-overlapping, the electron wave- packets in a metal strongly overlap with one another. This suggests that whereas molecules in an ordinary gas can be distinguished apart, electrons in a metal cannot be distinguished apart from one another. This indistinguishability has many fundamental implications which you will explore in more advanced Physics courses.]
Answer:
Temperature, T = 27°C = 27 +273 = 300 K
Mean separation between two electrons, r = 2 x 10^-10 m
de Broglie wavelength of an electron is given as
λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{3 m k T}}\)
where,
h = Planck’s constant = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
m = Mass of an electron = 9.11 x 10 ^-31 kg
k = Boltzmann’s constant = 1.38 x 10^-23 J mol^-1 K^-1
∴ λ = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{3 \times 9.11 \times 10^{-31} \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 300}}\)
= 6.2 x 10⁹ m
Hence, the de Broglie wavelength is much greater than the given inter-electron separation.

Question 37.
Answer the following questions :
(a) Quarks inside protons and neutrons are thought to carry fractional charges [(+2/3)e ; (-1/3)e]. Why do they not show up in Millikan’s oil-drop experiment?
(b) What is so special about the combination e/m? Why do we not simply talk of e and m separately?
(c) Why should gases be insulators at ordinary pressures and start conducting at very low pressures?
(d) Every metal has a definite work function. Why do all photoelectrons not come out with the same energy if incident radiation is monochromatic? Why is there an energy distribution of photoelectrons?
(e) The energy and momentum of an electron are related to the frequency and wavelength of the associated matter wave by the relations :
E = hv, p = \(\frac{\boldsymbol{h}}{\lambda}\)
But while the value of λ is physically significant, the value of v (and therefore, the value of the phase speed vλ) has no physical significance. Why?
Answer:
(a) Quarks inside protons and neutrons carry fractional charges. This is because nuclear force increases extremely if they are pulled apart. Therefore, fractional charges may exist in nature; observable charges are siti the integral multiple of an electrical charge.

(b) Thè basic relations for electric field and magnetic field are \(\left(e V=\frac{1}{2} m v^{2}\right)\) and \(\left(e B v=\frac{m v^{2}}{r}\right) \) respectively.

These relations include e (electric charge), y (velocity), m (mass), V (potential), r (radius), and B (magnetic field)._These relations give the value of velocity of an electron as \(\left(v=\sqrt{2 v\left(\frac{e}{m}\right)}\right) \text { and }\left(v=B r\left(\frac{e}{m}\right)\right)\) respectively. It can be observed from these relations that the dynamics of an electron is determined not by e and m separately, but by the ratio e / m.

(c) At atmospheric pressure, the ions of gases have no chance of reaching their respective electrons because of collision and recombination with other gas molecules. Hence, gases are insulators at atmospheric pressure. At low pressure, ions have a chance of reaching their respective electrodes and constitute a current. Hence, they conduct electricity at these pressures.

(d) The work function of a metal is the minimum energy required for a conduction electron to get out of the metal surface. All the electrons in an atom do not have the same energy level. When a ray having some photon energy is incident on a metal surface, the electrons come out from different levels with different energies. Hence, these emitted electrons show different energy distributions.

(e) The absolute value of energy of a particle is arbitrary within the additive constant. Hence, wavelength (λ) is significant, but the frequency (v) associated with an electron has no direct physical significance. Therefore, the product vλ (phase speed) has no physical significance. Group speed is given as

This Quantity has a physical meaning.

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physics Book Solutions Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physics Chapter 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

PSEB 12th Class Physics Guide Moving Charges and Magnetism Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A circular coil of wire consisting of 100 turns, each of radius
8.0 cm carries a current of 0.40 A. What is the magnitude of the magnetic field B at the centre of the coil?
Answer:
Number of turns on the circular coil, n = 100
Radius of each turn, r = 8.0 cm = 0.08 m
Current flowing in the coil, I = 0.4 A
Magnitude of the magnetic field at the centre of the coil is given by the relation,
\(|B|=\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 \pi n I}{r}\)
where, μ₀ = 4π × 10^-7 TmA^-1
\(|B|\) = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7}}{4 \pi}\) × \(\frac{2 \pi \times 100 \times 0.4}{0.08}\)
= 3.14 × 10^-4T
Hence, the magnitude of the magnetic field is 3.14 × 10^-4 T

Question 2.
A long straight wire carries a current of 35 A. What is the magnitude of the field B at a point 20 cm from the wire?
Answer:
Current in the wire, I = 35 A
Distance of the point from the wire, r = 20 cm = 0.2 m
Magnitude of the magnetic field at this point is given as
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \frac{2 I}{r}\)
B = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 2 \times 35}{4 \pi \times 0.2}\)
= 3.5 × 10^-5T
Hence, the magnitude of the magnetic field at a point 20 cm from the wire is 3.5 × 10^-5 T.

Question 3.
A long straight wire in the horizontal plane carries a current of 50 A in north to south direction. Give the magnitude and direction of B at a point 2.5 m east of the wire.
Answer:
Current in the wire, I = 50 A
A point is 2.5 m away from the east of the wire.
∴ Magnitude of the distance of the point from the wire, r = 2.5 m
Moving Charges and Magnetism ini
Magnitude of the magnetic field at that point is given by the relation,
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} 2 I}{4 \pi r}\)
= \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 2 \times 50}{4 \pi \times 2.5}\)
= 4 × 10^-6 T
The point is located normal to the wire length at a distance of 2.5 m. The direction of the current in the wire is vertically downward. Hence, according to the Maxwell’s right hand thumb rule, the direction of the magnetic field at the given point is vertically upward.

Question 4.
A horizontal overhead power line carries a current of 90 A in east to west direction. What is the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field due to the current 1.5 m below the line?
Answer:
Current in the power line, I = 90 A
Point is located below the power line at distance, r = 1.5 m
Hence, magnetic field at that point is given by the relation,
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} 2 I}{4 \pi r}\)
= \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 2 \times 90}{4 \pi \times 1.5}\) = 1.2 × 10^-5T
The current is flowing from east to west. The point is below the power line. Hence, according to Maxwell’s right hand thumb rule, the direction of the magnetic field is towards the south.

Question 5.
What is the magnitude of magnetic force per unit length on a wire carrying a current of 8 A and making an angle of 30° with the direction of a uniform magnetic field of 0.15 T?
Answer:
Current in the wire, I = 8 A
Magnitude of the uniform magnetic field, B = 0.15 T
Angle between the wire and magnetic field, θ = 30°.
Magnetic force per unit length on the wire is given as,
F = BI sinθ
= 0.15 × 8 × sin30°
= 0.15 × 8 × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 0.15 × 4 = 0.6 Nm^-1
Hence, the magnetic force per unit length on the wire is 0.6 Nm^-1.

Question 6.
A 3.0 cm wire carrying a current of 10 A is placed inside a solenoid perpendicular to its axis. The magnetic field inside the solenoid is given to be 0.27 T. What is the magnetic force on the wire?
Answer:
Length of the wire, l = 3 cm = 0.03 m
Current flowing in the wire, I = 10 A
Magnetic field, B = 0.27 T
Angle between the current and magnetic field, θ = 90°
Magnetic force exerted on the wire is given as,
F = BIl sinθ
= 0.27 × 10 × 0.03 × sin 90°
= 8.1 × 10^-2N
Hence, the magnetic force on the wire is 8.1 × 10^-2 N.

Question 7.
Two long and parallel straight wires A and B carrying currents of
8.0 A and 5.0 A in the same direction are separated by a distance of 4.0 cm. Estimate the force on a 10 cm section of wire A.
Answer:
Here, let I₁ and I₂ be the currents flowing in the straight long and parallel wires A and B respectively.
∴ I₁ = 8.0 A, I₂ = 5.0 A flowing in the same direction
r = distance between A and B = 4.0 cm = 4 × 10^-2 m
If F’ be the force per unit length on wire A, then using
F’ = \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi} \cdot \frac{2 I_{1} I_{2}}{r}\), we get
F’ = 10^-7 × \(\frac{2 \times 8 \times 5}{4 \times 10^{-2}}\) Nm^-1
= 20 × 10^-5 Nm^-1

If F be the force on a section of length 10 cm of wire A, then
F = F’ × l (Here,l = 10 × 10^-2m)
= 20 × 10^-5 × 10 × 10^-2N
= 2 × 10^-5N

Question 8.
A closely wound solenoid 80 cm long has 5 layers of windings of 400 turns each. The diameter of the solenoid is 1.8 cm. If the current carried is 8.0 A, estimate the magnitude of B inside the solenoid near its centre.
Answer:
Length of the solenoid, l = 80 cm = 0.8 m
Number of turns in each layer = 400
Number of layers in the solenoid = 5
∴ Total number of turns on the solenoid, N = 5 × 400 = 2000
Diameter of the solenoid, D = 1.8 cm = 0.018 m
Current carried by the solenoid, I = 8.0 A
Magnitude of the magnetic field inside the solenoid near its centre is given by the relation,
g.hoM
B = \(=\frac{\mu_{0} N I}{l}\)
B = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 2000 \times 8}{0.8}\)
= 8 π × 10^-3 = 2.512 × 10^-2 T
Hence, the magnitude of the magnetic field inside the solenoid near its centre is 2.512 × 10^-2 T.

Question 9.
A square coil of side 10 cm consists of 20 turns and carries a current of 12 A. The coil is suspended vertically and the normal to the plane of the coil makes an angle of 30° with the direction of a uniform horizontal magnetic field of magnitude 0.80 T. What is the magnitude of torque experienced by the coil?
Answer:
Length of a side of the square coil, l = 10 cm = 0.1 m
Current flowing in the coil, I = 12 A
Number of turns on the coil, N = 20
Angle made by the plane of the coil with magnetic field, θ = 30°
Strength of magnetic field, B = 0.80 T
Magnitude of the torque experienced by the coil in the magnetic field is given by the relation,
τ = NBIAsinθ
where, A = Area of the square coil
⇒ l × l = 0.1 × 0.1 = 0.01 m²
∴ τ = 20 × 0.80 × 12 × 0.01 × sin30°
= 20 × 0.80 × 12 × 0.01 × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 0.96 N m
Hence, the magnitude of the torque experienced by the coil is 0.96 N m.

Question 10.
Two moving coil meters, M₁ and M₂ have the following particulars:
R₁ = 10 Ω, N₁ = 30,
A₁ = 3.6 × 10^-3 m², B₁ = 0.25T
R₂ = 14Ω, N₂ = 42,
A₂ = 1.8 × 10^-3 m², B₂ = 0.50 T
(The spring constants are identical for the two meters). Determine the ratio of (a) current sensitivity and (b) voltage sensitivity of M₂ and M₁.
Answer:
Here,R₁ = 10 n, N₁ = 30, A₁ = 3.6 x 10^-3 m²,B₁ = 0.25T for coil M₁
R₂ = 14 Q, N₂ = 42, A₂ = 1.8 x 10^-3 m²,B₂ = 0.50T for coil M₂.
We know that current sensitivity and voltage sensitivity are given by the formulae
Current sensitivity = \(\frac{N B A}{k}\)
and Voltage sensitivity = \(\frac{N B A}{k R}\)
Here, k₁ = k₂ for the two coils = k (say)
∴ Current sensitivity for M₁ is given by = N₁B₁A₁/ k and for M₂ = N₂B₂A₂ / k

(a) Current sensitivity ratio for M₂ and M₁ is given by
= \(\frac{\frac{N_{2} B_{2} A_{2}}{k}}{\frac{N_{1} B_{1} A_{1}}{k}}\)

Question 11.
In a chamber, a uniform magnetic field of 6.5 G (1 G = 10^-4 T) is maintained. An electron is shot into the field with a speed of 4.8 × 10⁶ ms^-1 normal to the field. Explain why the path of the electron is a circle. Determine the radius of the circuit orbit.
e,= 1.6 × 10^-19 (m_e = 9.1 × 10 ^-31 kg
Answer:
Magnetic field strength, B = 6.5 G = 6.5 × 10^-4 T
Speed of the electron, y = 4.8 × 10⁶ m/s
Charge on the electron, e,= 1.6 × 10^-19 C
Mass of the electron, me 9.1 × 10^-31 kg
Angle between the electron and magnetic field, θ = 90°
Magnetic force exerted on the electron in the magnetic field is given as :
F = evBsinθ
This force provides centripetal force to the moving electron. Hence, the electron starts moving in a circular path of radius r.
Hence, centripetal force exerted on the electron,
F_e = \(\frac{m v^{2}}{r}\)
In equilibrium, the centripetal force exerted on the electron is equal to the magnetic force t.e.,
F_e = F
\(\frac{m v^{2}}{r}\) = evBsinθ
r = \(\frac{m v}{B e \sin \theta}\)
= \(\frac{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 4.8 \times 10^{6}}{6.5 \times 10^{-4} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times \sin 90^{\circ}}\)
= 4.2 × 10^-2 m = 4.2 cm
Hence, the radius of the circular orbit of the electron is 4.2 cm.

Question 12.
In Exercise 4.11 obtain the frequency of revolution of the electron in its circular orbit. Does the answer depend on the speed of the electron? Explain.
Answer:
Magnetic field strength, B = 6.5 × 10^-4 T
Charge on the electron, e = 1.6 × 10^-19 C
Mass of the electron, m_e = 9.1 × 10^-31 kg
Velocity of the electron, v = 4.8 × 10⁶ m/s
Radius of the orbit, r = 4.2 cm = 0.042 m
Frequency of revolution of the electron = v
Angular frequency of the electron = ω = 2πv
Velocity of the electron is related to the angular frequency as :
v = rω
In the circular orbit, the magnetic force on the electron is balanced by the centripetal force. Hence, we can write :
evB = \(\frac{m v^{2}}{r}\)
eB = \(\frac{m}{r}\) (rω) = \(\frac{m}{r}\) (r2πv)
v = \(\frac{B e}{2 \pi m}\)

This expression for frequency is independent of the speed of the electron. On substituting the known values in this expression, we get the frequency as:
V = \(=\frac{6.5 \times 10^{-4} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{2 \times 3.14 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31}}\)
= 18.2 × 10⁶ Hz ≈ 18 MHz
Hence, the frequency of the electron is around 18 MHz and is independent of the speed of the electron.

Question 13.
(a) A circular coil of 30 turns and radius 8.0 cm carrying a current of 6.0 A is suspended vertically in a uniform horizontal magnetic field of magnitude 1.0 T. The field lines make an angle of 60° with the normal of the coil. Calculate the magnitude of the counter torque that must be applied to prevent the coil from turning.

(b) Would your answer change, if the circular coil in (a) were replaced by a planar coil of some irregular shape that encloses, the same area? (All other particulars are also unaltered.)
Answer:
(a) Number of turns on the circular coil, N = 30
Radius of the coil, r = 8.0 cm = 0.08 m
Area of the coil = πr² = π(0.08)² = 0.0201 m²
Current flowing in the coil, I = 6.0 A
Magnetic field strength, B = 1.0 T
Angle between the field lines and normal with the coil surface,
θ = 60°
The coil experiences a torque in the magnetic field. Hence, it turns. The. counter torque applied to prevent the coil from turning is given by the relation,
τ = N IBAsinθ …………… (1)
= 30 × 6 × 1 × 0.0201 × sin60°
= 180 × 0.0201 × \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)
= 3.133 Nm

(b) It can be inferred from relation (1) that the magnitude of the applied torque is not dependent on the shape of the coil. It depends on the area of the coil. Hence, the answer would not change if the circular coil in the above case is replaced by a planar coil of some irregular shape that encloses the same area.

Question 14.
Two concentric circular coils X and Y of radii 16 cm and 10 cm, respectively, lie in the same vertical plane containing the north to south direction. Coil X has 20 turns and carries a current of 16 A; coil Y has 25 turns and carries a current of 18 A. The sense of the current in X is anticlockwise, and clockwise in Y, for an observer looking at the coils facing west. Give the magnitude and direction of the net magnetic field due to the coils at their centre.
Answer:
Radius of coil X, r₁ = 16 cm = 0.16 m
Radius of coil Y, r₂ = 10 cm = 0.10 m
Number of turns on coil X, n₁ = 20
Number of turns on coil Y, n₂ = 25
Current in coil X,I₁ =16 A
Current in coil Y, I₂ = 18 A
Magnetic field due to coil X at their centre is given by the relation,
B₁ = \(\frac{\mu_{0} n_{1} I_{1}}{2 r_{1}}\)
∴ B₁ = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 20 \times 16}{2 \times 0.16}\)
= 4π × 10^-4 T (towards East)
Magnetic field due to coil Y at their centre is given by the relation,
B₂ = \(\frac{\mu_{0} n_{2} I_{2}}{2 r_{2}}\)
\(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 25 \times 18}{2 \times 0.10}\)
= 9π × 10^-4 T (towards West)

Hence, net magnetic field can be obtained as:
B = B₂ – B₁
= 9π × 10^-4 – 4π × 10^-4
= 5π × 10 T
= 1.57 × 10^-3 T (towards West)

Question 15.
A magnetic field of 100 G (1 G = 10^-4 T) is required which is uniform in a region of linear dimension about 10 cm and area of cross-section about 10^-3 m². The maximum current-carrying capacity of a given coil of wire is 15 A and the number of turns per unit length that can be wound round a core is at most 1000 turns m^-1 . Suggest some appropriate design particulars of a solenoid for the required purpose. Assume the core is not ferromagnetic.
Answer:
Here, B = magnetic field = 100 G = 100 × 10^-4 = 10^-2 T,
I_max = maximum current carried by the coil = 15 A
n = number of turns per unit length = 1000 turns m^-1 = 10 tums/cm
l = length of linear region = 10 cm
A = area of cross-section = 10^-3 m².

To produce a magnetic field in the above mentioned region, a solenoid can be made so that well within the solenoid, the magnetic field is uniform. To do so, we may take the length L of the solenoid 5 times the length of the region and area of the solenoid 5 times the area of region.

∴ L = 5l = 5 × 10 = 50 cm = 0.5m
and A = 5 × 10^-3 m²
∴ If r be the radius of the solenoid, then
πr² = A = 5 × 10^-3
or r = \(\sqrt{\frac{5 \times 10^{-3}}{3.14}}\) = 0.04 m = 4 cm
Also let us wind 500 turns on the coil so that the number of turns per m is
n = \(\frac{500}{0.5}\) = 1000 turns m^-1
∴ Using formula, μ₀nI = B, we get
I = \(\frac{B}{\mu_{0} n}\) = \(\frac{10^{-2}}{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 1000}\) = 7.96 A ≈ 8A

So, a current of 8 A can be passed through it to produce a uniform magnetic field of 100 G in the region. But this is not a unique way. If we wind 300 turns on the solenoid, then number of turns is
n = \(\frac{300}{0.5}\) = 600 per m.
∴ I= \(\frac{B}{\mu_{0} n}\) = \(\frac{10^{-2}}{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 600}\) = 13.3 A
i. e., a current of 13.3 A can be passed through it to produce the magnetic field of loo G.
Similarly, if no. of turns = 400,
then, n = \(\frac{400}{0.5}\) = 800 per m.
∴ I = \(\frac{B}{\mu_{0} n}\) = \(\frac{10^{-2}}{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 800}\) = 9.95 A
i. e., a current of 10 A can be passed ≈ 10 A
Through it to produce B = 100 G
Thus we may achieve the result in a number of ways.

Question 16.
For a circular coil of radius R and N turns carrying current J, the magnitude of the magnetic field at a point on its axis at a distance x from its centre is given by,
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} I R^{2} N}{2\left(x^{2}+R^{2}\right)^{3 / 2}}\)
(a) Show that this reduces to the familiar result for field at the centre of the coil.
(b) Consider two parallel co-axial circular coils of equal radius R, and number of turns N, carrying equal currents in the same direction, and separated by a distance R. Show that the field on the axis around the mid-point between the coils is uniform over a distance that is small as compared to JR, and is given by,
B = 0.72 \(\frac{\mu_{0} \boldsymbol{N I}}{\boldsymbol{R}}\), approximately.
[Such an arrangement to produce a nearly uniform magnetic field over a small region is known as Helmholtz coils.]
Answer:
Radius of circular coil = R
Number of turns on the coil = N
Current in the coil = I
Magnetic field at a point on its axis at distance x from its centre is given by the relation,
B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} I R^{2} N}{2\left(x^{2}+R^{2}\right)^{3 / 2}}\)

(a) If the magnetic field at the centre of the coil is considered, then x = 0
∴ B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} I R^{2} N}{2 R^{3}}=\frac{\mu_{0} I N}{2 R}\)
This is the familiar result for magnetic field at the centre of the coil,

(b) Radii of two parallel co-axial circular coils = R
Number of turns on each coil = N
Current in both coils = I
Distance between both the coils = R
Let us consider point Q at distance d from the centre.
Then, one coil is at a distance of \(\frac{R}{2}\) + d from point Q.


Hence, it is proved that the field on the axis around the mid-point between the coils is uniform.

Question 17.
A toroid has a core (non-ferromagnetic) of inner radius 25 cm and outer radius 26 cm, around which 3500 turns of a wire are wound. If the current in the wire is 11 A, what is the magnetic field (a) outside the toroid, (b) inside the core of the toroid, and (c) in the empty space surrounded by the toroid.
Answer:
Here, I = 11 A,
Total number of turns = 3500
Mean radius of toroid, r = \(\frac{25+26}{2}\)
r = 25.5cm = 25.5 × 10^-2 m
Total length of the toroid = 2πr = 2π × 25.5 × 10^-2
= 51π × 10^-2m
Therefore, number of turns per unit length,
n = \(\frac{3500}{51 \pi \times 10^{-2}}\)

(a) The field is non-zero only inside the core surrounded by the windings of the toroid. Therefore, the field outside the toroid is zero.

(b) The field inside the core of the toroid
B = μ₀nI
B = 4π × 10^-7 × \(\frac{3500}{51 \pi \times 10^{-2}}\) × 11
B = 3.02 × 10^-2 T

(c) For the reason given in (a), the field in the empty space surrounded by toroid is also zero.

Question 18.
Answer the following questions:
(a) A magnetic field that varies in magnitude from point to point but has a constant direction (east to west) is set up in a chamber. A charged particle enters the chamber and travels undeflected along a straight path with constant speed. What can you say about the initial velocity of the particle?

(b) A charged particle enters an environment of a strong and non-uniform magnetic field varying from point to point both in magnitude and direction and comes out of it following a complicated trajectory. Would its final speed equal the initial speed if it suffered no collisions with the environment?

(c) An electron travelling west to east enters a chamber having a uniform electrostatic field in north to south direction. Specify the direction in which a uniform magnetic field should be set up to prevent the electron from deflecting from its straight line path.
Answer:
(a) The initial velocity of the particle is either parallel or anti-parallel to the magnetic field. Hence, it travels along a straight path without suffering any deflection in the field.

(b) Yes, the final speed’ of the charged particle will be equal to its initial speed. This is because magnetic force can change the direction of velocity, but not its magnitude.

(c) An electron travelling from west to east enters a chamber having a uniform electrostatic field in the north-south direction. This moving electron can remain undeflected if the electric force acting on it is equal and opposite of magnetic field. Magnetic force is directed towards the south. According to Fleming’s left hand rule, magnetic field should be applied in a vertically downward direction.

Question 19.
An electron emitted by a heated cathode and accelerated through a potential difference of 2.0 kV, enters a region with uniform magnetic field of 0.15 T. Determine the trajectory of the electron if the field (a) is transverse to its initial velocity, (b) makes an angle of 30° with the initial velocity.
Answer:
Magnetic field strength, B = 0.15 T
Charge on the electron, e = 1.6 × 10^-19C
Mass of the electron, m = 9.1 × 10^-31 kg
Potential difference, V = 2.0 kV = 2 × 10³ V
Thus, kinetic energy of the electron = eV
⇒ eV = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mv²
v = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 e V}{m}}\) ……………. (1)
where, v = Velocity of the electron
Magnetic force on the electron provides the required centripetal force of the electron. Hence, the electron traces a circular path of radius r.

(a) When the magnetic field is transverse to the initial velocity. The force on the electron due to transverse magnetic field = Bev

= 100.55 × 10^-5
= 1.01 × 10^-3 m = 1 mm
Hence, the electron has a circular trajectory of radius 1.0 mm normal to the magnetic field.

(b) When the magnetic field makes an angle θ of 30° with initial velocity, the initial velocity will be,
v₁ = vsinθ
From equation (2), we can write the expression for new radius as :
r₁ = \(\frac{m v_{1}}{B e}\)
= \(\frac{m v \sin \theta}{B e}\)

= 0.5 × 10^-3 m = 0.5mm
Hence, the electron has a helical trajectory of radius 0.5 mm along the magnetic field direction.

Question 20.
A magnetic field set up using Helmholtz coils (described in Exercise 4.16) is uniform in a small region and has a magnitude of 0.75 T. In the same region, a uniform electrostatic field is maintained in a direction normal to the common axis of the coils. A narrow beam of (single species) charged particles all accelerated through 15 kV enters this region in a direction perpendicular to both the axis of the coils and the electrostatic Held. If the beam remains undeflected when the electrostatic field is 9.0 × 10^-5 V m^-1, make a simple guess as to what the beam contains. Why is the answer not unique?
Answer:
Magnetic field, B = 0.75 T
Accelerating voltage, V = 15 kV = 15 × 10³ V
Electrostatic field, E = 9 × 10^-5 Vm^-1
Mass of the electron = m
Charge on the electron = e
Velocity of the electron = v
Kinetic energy of the electron = eV
⇒ \(\frac{1}{2}\)mv² = eV
∴ \(\frac{e}{m}=\frac{v^{2}}{2 V}\) ……………. (1)
Since the particle remains undeflected by electric and magnetic fields, we can infer that the electric field is balancing the magnetic field.
∴ eE = evB
v = \(\frac{E}{B}\) …………. (2)
Putting equation (2) in equation (1), we get

= 4.8 × 10⁷ C/kg
Also, we know that \(\frac{e}{m}\) for proton is 9.6 × 10^-7 C kg^-1 . It follows that the charged particle under reference has the value of \(\frac{e}{m}\) half of that for the
proton, so its mass is clearly double the mass of proton. Thus the beam may be of deutrons.
The answer is not unique as the ratio of charge to mass i. e.,
4.8 × 10⁷ C kg^-1 may be satisfied by many other charged particles, surch as
He⁺⁺(\(\frac{2 e}{2 m}\)) and Li³⁺ (\(\frac{3 e}{3 m}\))
which have the same value of \(\frac{e}{m}\).

Question 21.
A straight horizontal conducting rod of length 0.45 m and mass 60 g is suspended by two vertical wires at its ends. A current of 5.0 A is set up in the rod through the wires.
(a) What magnetic field should be set up normal to the conductor in order that the tension in the wires is zero?
(b) What will be the total tension in the wires if the direction of current is reversed keeping the magnetic field same as before? (Ignore the mass of the wires.) g = 9.8 ms^-2.
Answer:
Length of the rod, l = 0.45 m
Mass of the rod, m = 60 g = 60 × 10^-3 kg
Acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.8 m/s²
Current in the rod flowing through the wire, I = 5 A

(a) Magnetic field (B) is equal and opposite to the weight of the rod i.e.,
BIl = mg
∴ B = \(\frac{m g}{I l}\) = \(\frac{60 \times 10^{-3} \times 9.8}{5 \times 0.45}\) = 0.26T
A horizontal magnetic field of 0.26 T normal to the length of the conductor should be set up in order to get zero tension in the wire. The magnetic field should be such that Fleming’s left hand rule gives an upward magnetic force.

(b) If the direction of the current is reversed, then the force due to magnetic field and the weight of the rod acts in a vertically downward direction.
∴ Total tension in the wire = BIl + mg
= 0.26 × 5 × 0.45 + (60 × 10^-3) × 9.8
= 1.176 N

Question 22.
The wires which connect the battery of an automobile to its starting motor carry a current of 300 A (for a short time). What is the force per unit length between the wires if they are 70 cm long and 1.5 cm apart? Is the force attractive or repulsive?
Answer:
Current in both wires, I = 300 A
Distance between the wires, r = 1.5 cm = 0.015 m
Length of the both wires, l = 70 cm = 0.7 m
Force between the two wires is given by the relation,
F = \(\frac{\mu_{0} I^{2}}{2 \pi r}\)
∴ F = \(\frac{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times(300)^{2}}{2 \pi \times 0.015}\) = 1.2 N/M
Since the direction of the current in the wires is opposite, a repulsive force exists between them.

Question 23.
A uniform magnetic field of 1.5 T exists in a cylindrical region of radius 10.0 cm, its direction parallel to the axis along east to west. A wire carrying current of 7.0 A in the north to south direction passes through this region. What is the magnitude and direction of the force on the wire if,
(a) the wire intersects the axis,
(b) the wire is turned from N-S to northeast-northwest direction,
(c) the wire in the N-S direction is lowered from the axis by a distance of 6.0 cm?
Answer:
Magnetic field strength, B = 1.5 T
Radius of the cylindrical region, r = 10cm = 0.1m
Current in the wire passing through the cylindrical region, I = 7 A

(a) If the wire intersects the axis, then the length of the wire is the diameter of the cylindrical region.
Thus, l = 2r = 2 × 0.1 = 0.2 m
Angle between magnetic field and current, θ = 90°
Magnetic force acting on the wire is given by the relation,
F = BIl sinθ
= 1.5 × 7 × 0.2 × sin90° = 2.1N
Hence, a force of 2.1 N acts on the wire in a vertically downward direction.

(b) New length of the wire after turning it to the northeast-northwest direction can be given as:
l₁ = \(\frac{l}{\sin \theta}\)
Angle between magnetic field and current, θ = 45°
Force on the wire,
F₁ = BIl₁ sinθ
\(\frac{B I l}{\sin \theta}\) = sinθ
= BIl = 1.5 × 7 × 0.2 = 2.1 N
Hence, a force of 2.1 N acts vertically downward on the wire. This is independent of angle because Z sinG is fixed.

(c) The wire is lowered from the axis by distance, d = 6.0 cm
Let l₂ be the new length of the wire.
∴ (\(\frac{l_{2}}{2}\))² = 4(d + r)
= 4 (10 + 6) = 4(16)
∴ l₂ = 8 × 2 = 16 cm = 0.16 m
Magnetic force exerted on the wire,
F₂ = BIl₂
= 1.5 × 7 × 0.16 = 1.68 N
Hence, a force of 1.68 N acts in a vertically downward direction on the wire.

Question 24.
A uniform magnetic field of 3000 G is established along the positive z-direction. A rectangular loop of sides 10 cm and 5 cm carries a current of 12 A. What is the torque on the loop in the different cases shown in Fig. 4.28? What is the force on each case? Which case corresponds to stable equilibrium?

Answer:
Here,
B = uniform magnetic field
= 3000 gauss along z-axis
= 3000 × 10^-4T = 0.3 T
l = length of rectangular loop
= 10 cm = 0.1 m
b = breath of rectangular loop
= 5 cm = 0.05 m
∴ A = area of rectangular loop
= l × b = 10 × 5 = 50cm² = 50 × 10^-4 m²
Torque on the loop is given by
\(\vec{\tau}\) = (I\(\vec{A}\)) × \(\vec{B}\)
IA = 50 × 10^-4 × 12 = 0.06 Am⁺²

(a) Here, I\(\vec{A}\) = 0.06î Am², \(\vec{B}\) = 0.3k̂T
∴ \(\vec{\tau}\) = 0.06î × 0.3k̂= -1.8 × 10^-2 Nm ĵ
i.e., τ = 1.8 × 10^-2 Nm and acts along negative y-axis.



Net force on a planar loop in a magnetic field is always zero, so force is
zero in each case.
Case (e) corresponds to stable equilibrium as 7 A is aligned with B while (f) corresponds to unstable equilibrium as 7 A is antiparallel to B.

Question 25.
A circular coil of 20 turns and radius 10 cm is placed in a uniform magnetic field of 0.10 T normal to the plane of the coil. If the current in the coil is 5.0 A, what is the
(a) total torque on the coil,
(b) total force on the coil,
(c) average force on each electron in the coil due’ to the magnetic field?
(The coil is made of copper wire of cross-sectional area 10^-5 m², and the free electron density in copper is given to be about 10²⁹ m^-3.)
Answer:
Number of turns on the circular coil, n = 20
Radius of the coil, r = 10cm = 0.1m
Magnetic field strength, B = 0.10 T
Current in the coil, I = 5.0 A
(a) The total torque on the coil is zero because the field is uniform.
(b) The total force on the coil is zero because the field is uniform.
(c) Cross-sectional area of copper coil, A = 10^-5 m²
Number of free electrons per cubic meter in copper, N = 10²⁹ / m³
Charge on the electron, e = 1.6 × 10^-19C
Magnetic force, F = Bev_d
Where, v_d = \(\frac{I}{N e A}\)
∴ F = \(\frac{B e I}{N e A}=\frac{B I}{N A}\) = \(\frac{0.10 \times 5.0}{10^{29} \times 10^{-5}}\) 5 × 10^-25N
Hence, the average force on each electron is 5 × 10^-25 N.

Question 26.
A solenoid 60 cm long and of radius 4.0 cm has 3 layers of windings of 300 turns each. A 2.0 cm long wire of mass 2.5 g lies inside the solenoid (near its centre) normal to its axis; both the wire and the axis of the solenoid are in the horizontal plane. The wire is connected through two leads parallel to the axis of the solenoid to an external battery which supplies a current of 6.0 A in the wire. What value of current (with appropriate sense of circulation) in the windings of the solenoid can support the weight of the wire? g = 9.8 ms^-2.
Length of the solenoid, L = 60 cm = 0.6 m
Radius of the solenoid, r = 4.0 cm = 0.04 m
It is given that there are 3 layers of windings of 300 turns each.
∴ Total number of turns, n = 3 × 300 = 900
Length of the wire, l = 2 cm = 0.02 m
Mass of the wire, m = 2.5 g = 2.5 × 10 ^-3 kg
Current flowing through the wire, i = 6 A
Acceleration due to gravity, g=9.8m/s²
Magnetic field produced inside the solenoid, B = \(\frac{\mu_{0} n I}{L}\)
where, μ₀ = 4π × 10^-7 TmA^-1
I = Current flowing through the windings of the solenoid Magnetic force is given by the relation,
F = Bil = \(\frac{\mu_{0} n i I}{L}\)l
Also, the force on the wire is equal to the weight of the wire.
∴ mg = \(\frac{\mu_{0} n \text { Iil }}{L}\)
I = \(\frac{m g L}{\mu_{0} \text { nil }}\)
= \(\frac{2.5 \times 10^{-3} \times 9.8 \times 0.6}{4 \pi \times 10^{-7} \times 900 \times 0.02 \times 6}\) = 108A
Hence, the current flowing through the solenoid is 108 A.

Question 27.
A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 12 Ω and the metre shows full scale deflection for a current of 3 mA. How will you convert the metre into a voltmeter of range 0 to 18 V?
Answer:
Resistance of the galvanometer coil, G = 12 Ω
Current for which there is full scale deflection, I_g = 3 mA = 3 × 10^-3 A
Range of the voltmeter is 0, which needs to be converted to 18 V.
∴ V = 18 V
Let a resistor of resistance R be connected in series with the galvanometer to convert it into a voltmeter. This resistance is given as
R = \(\frac{V}{I_{g}}\) – G
= \(\frac{18}{3 \times 10^{-3}}\) – 12 = 6000 – 12 = 5988 Ω
Hence, a resistor of resistance 5988 Ω is to be connected in series with the galvanometer.

Question 28.
A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 15 Ω and the metre shows full scale deflection for a current of 4 mA. How will you convert the metre into an ammeter of range 0 to 6 A?
Answer:
Resistance of the galvanometer coil, G = 15 Ω
Current for which the galvanometer shows full scale deflection,
I_g = 4 mA = 4 × 10^-3A
Range of the ammeter is 0, which needs to be converted to 6 A.
∴ Current, I = 6 A
A shunt resistor of resistance S is to be connected in parallel with the galvanometer to convert it into an ammeter. The value of S is given as :
S = \(\frac{I_{g} G}{I-I_{g}}\) = \(\frac{4 \times 10^{-3} \times 15}{6-4 \times 10^{-3}}\)
S = \(\frac{6 \times 10^{-2}}{6-0.004}=\frac{0.06}{5.996}\) ≈ 0.01Ω = 10mΩ
Hence, a 10 mΩ shunt resistor is to be connected in parallel with the galvanometer.

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physics Book Solutions Chapter 12 Atoms Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physics Chapter 12 Atoms

PSEB 12th Class Physics Guide Atoms Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Choose the correct alternative from the clues given at the end of the each statement:
(a) The size of the atom in Thomson’s model is ………………….. the atomic size in Rutherford’s model, (much greater than/no different from/much less than.)
(b) In the ground state of ………………………………… electrons are in stable equilibrium, while in …………………….. electrons always experience a net force. (Thomson’s model/Rutherford’s model.)
(c) A classical atom based on ……………………………. is doomed to collapse. (Thomson’s model/Rutherford’s model.)
(d) An atom has a nearly continuous mass distribution in a ………………………… but has a highly non-uniform mass distribution in …………………….. (Thomson’s model/Rutherford’s model.)
(e) The positively charged part of the atom possesses most of ………………………. the mass in ………………….. (Rutherford’s model/both the models.)
Answer:
(a) The size of the atom in Thomson’s model is no different from the atomic size in Rutherford’s model.
(b) In the ground state of Thomson’s model, electrons are in stable equilibrium while, in Rutherford’s model, electrons always experience a net force.
(c) A classical atom based on Rutherford’s model is doomed to collapse.
(d) An atom has a nearly continuous mass distribution in Thomson’s model but has a highly non-uniform mass distribution in Rutherford’s model.
(e) The positively charged part of the atom possesses most of the mass in both the models.

Question 2.
Suppose you are given a chance to repeat the alpha-particle scattering experiment using a thin sheet of solid hydrogen in place of the gold foil. (Hydrogen is a solid at temperatures below 14 K.) What results do you expect?
Answer:
The basic purpose of scattering experiment is not completed because solid hydrogen will be a much lighter target as compared to the alpha particle acting as a projectile. By using the conditions of elastic collisions, the hydrogen will move much faster as compared to alpha after the collision. We cannot determine the size of hydrogen nucleus.

Question 3.
What is the shortest wavelength present in the Paschen series of spectral lines?
Answer:
Rydberg’s formula is given as
\(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) = \(21.76 \times 10^{-19}\left[\frac{1}{n_{1}^{2}}-\frac{1}{n_{2}^{2}}\right]\)
where, h = Planck’s constant = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
c=Speed oflight=3 x 10⁸ m/s (n₁ and n₂ are integers)
The shortest wavelength present in the Paschen series of the spectral lines
is given for values n₁ = 3 and n₂ = ∞

= 822.65 nm

Question 4.
A difference of 2.3 eV separates two energy levels in an atom. What is the frequency of radiation emitted when the atom makes a transition from the upper level to the lower level?
Answer:
According to Bohr’s postulate
E₂ – E₁ = hv
∴ Frequency of emitted radiation

Question 5.
The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. What are the kinetic and potential energies of the electron in this state?
Answer:
Given, the ground state energy of hydrogen atom
E=-13.6eV
We know that,
Kinetic Energy, E_K = -E = 13.6 eV
Potential Energy E_p = -2KE =-2 x 13.6 = -27.2eV

Question 6.
A hydrogen atom initially In the ground level absorbs a photon, which excites it to the n = 4 level. Determine the wavelength and frequency of photons.
Answer:
The energy levels of H-atom are given by
E_n = \(-\frac{R h c}{n^{2}}\)
For given transition n₁ =1, n₂ = 4
∴ E₁ = \(-\frac{R h c}{1^{2}}\) ,E₂= \(-\frac{R h c}{4^{2}}\)
∴ Energy of absorbed photon
ΔE=E₂ -E₁ =Rhc \(\left(\frac{1}{1^{2}}-\frac{1}{4^{2}}\right)\)
or
ΔE = \(\frac{15}{16}\) Rhc ………………………….. (1)
∴ The wavelength of absorbed photon λ is given by

Question 7.
(a) Using the Bohr’s model, calculate the speed of the electron in a hydrogen atom in the n =1, 2, and 3 levels.
(b) Calculate the orbital period in each of these levels.
Answer:
(a) Let y1 be the orbital speed of the electron in a hydrogen atom in the ground state level, n₁ =1.
For charge (e) of an electron, v₁ is given by the relation,
v₁ = \(\frac{e^{2}}{n_{1} 4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right)}=\frac{e^{2}}{2 \varepsilon_{0} h} \)
where, e=1.6 x 10^-19 C
\(\varepsilon_{0}\) = Permittivity of free space = 8.85 x 10^-12 N^-1 C²m²
h = Planck’s constant = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
∴ v₁ = \(\frac{\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)^{2}}{2 \times 8.85 \times 10^{-12} \times 6.63 \times 10^{-34}}\)
= 0.0218 x 10⁸ =2.18 x 10⁶ m/s

For level n₂ =2, we can write the relation for the corresponding orbital speed as
v₂ = \(\frac{e^{2}}{n_{2} 2 \varepsilon_{0} h}\) = \(\frac{\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)^{2}}{2 \times 2 \times 8.85 \times 10^{-12} \times 6.63 \times 10^{-34}}\) = 1.09 x 10⁶ m/s
And, for n₃ =3, we can write the relation for the corresponding orbital speed as


Hence, the speed of the electron in a hydrogen atom in n = 1, n = 2 and n = 3 is 2.18 x 10⁶ m/s,
1.09 x 10⁶ m/s, 7.27 x 10⁵ m/s respectively.

(b) Orbital period of electron is given by
T = \(\frac{2 \pi r}{v}\)
Radius of nth orbit
r_n = \(\frac{n^{2} h^{2}}{4 \pi^{2} K m e^{2}}\)
∴ r₁ = \(\frac{(1)^{2} \times\left(6.63 \times 10^{-34}\right)^{2}}{4 \times 9.87 \times\left(9 \times 10^{9}\right) \times 9 \times 10^{-31} \times\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)}\)
= 0.53 x 10^-10 m
For n=1, T₁ = \(\frac{2 \pi r_{1}}{v_{1}}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 3.14 \times 0.53 \times 10^{-10}}{2.19 \times 10^{6}}\) = 1.52 x 10^-16s

For n = 2, radius r_n = n²r₁
∴ r₂ =’2².r₁ =4 x0.53 x 10^-10
and velocity v_n, = \(\frac{v_{1}}{n}\)
∴ v₂ = \(\frac{v_{1}}{2}=\frac{2.19 \times 10^{6}}{2}\)
Time period T₂ = \(\frac{2 \times 3.14 \times 4 \times 0.53 \times 10^{-10} \times 2}{2.19 \times 10^{6}}\)
=1216 x 10^-15 s
For n=3,radius r³ =3²,r₁ =9r₁ =9 x 0.53 x 10^-10m and velocity v₃ = \(\frac{v_{1}}{3}=\frac{2.19 \times 10^{6}}{3}\) m/s
Time period T₃ = \(\frac{2 \pi r_{3}}{v_{3}}=\frac{2 \times 3.14 \times 9 \times 0.53 \times 10^{-10} \times 3}{2.19 \times 10^{6}}\) = 4.1 x 10^-15 s

Question 8.
The radius of the innermost electron orbit of a hydrogen atom is 5.3 x 10^-11 m. What are the radii of the n = 2 and n = 3 orbits?
Answer:
The radius of the innermost electron orbit of a hydrogen atom, r₁ = 5.3 x 10^-11 m.
Let r₂ be the radius of the orbit at n = 2.
It is related to the radius of the innermost orbit as r₂ = (n)²r₁ = (2)² x 5.3 x 10^-11
= 4 x 5.3 x 10^-11 = 2.12 x 10^-10m
For n = 3, we can write the corresponding electron radius as
r³ =(n)²r₁ = (3)² x 5.3 x 10^-11
n = 9 x 5.3 x 10^-11 = 4.77 x 10^-10m
Hence, the radii of an electron for n = 2 and n = 3 orbits are 2.12 x 10^-10 m and 4.77 x 10^-10 m respectively.

Question 9.
A 12.5 eV electron beam is used to bombard gaseous hydrogen at room temperature. What series of wavelengths will be emitted?
Answer:
It is given that the energy of the electron beam used to bombard gaseous hydrogen at room temperature is 12.5 eV. Also, the energy of the gaseous hydrogen in its ground state at room temperature is -13.6 eV. When gaseous hydrogen is bombarded with an electron beam, the energy of the gaseous hydrogen becomes -13.6 + 12.5 eV i. e., -1.1 eV.

Orbital energy is related to orbit level (n) as
E = \(\frac{-13.6}{(n)^{2}}\)eV
For n=3, E = \(\frac{-13.6}{(3)^{2}}=\frac{-13.6}{9}\) = -1.5 eV
This energy is approximately equal to the energy of gaseous hydrogen. it can be concluded that the electron has jumped from n I to n = 3 level.

During its de-excitation, the electrons can jump from n = 3 to n = 1 directly, which forms a line of the Lyman series of the hydrogen spectrum.
We have the relation for wave number for Lyman series as
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R_{y}\left(\frac{1}{1^{2}}-\frac{1}{n^{2}}\right)\)
where, R_y =Rydberg constant = 1.097 x 10⁷ m^-1,
λ = Wavelength of radiation emitted by the transition of the electron for
n =3,
We can obtain λ as
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = 1.097 x 10⁷\(\left(\frac{1}{1^{2}}-\frac{1}{3^{2}}\right)\)
= 1.097 x 10⁷ \(\left(1-\frac{1}{9}\right)\) = 1.097 x 10⁷x \(\frac{8}{9}\)

λ = \(\frac{9}{8 \times 1.097 \times 10^{7}}\) = 102.55nm
If the electron jumps from n = 2 to n = 1, then the wavelength of the radiation is given as
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}\) = 1.097 x 10⁷ \(\left(\frac{1}{1^{2}}-\frac{1}{2^{2}}\right)\)
= 1.097 x 10⁷\(\left(1-\frac{1}{4}\right)\) = 1.097 x 10⁷x \(\frac{3}{4}\)
λ = \(\frac{4}{1.097 \times 10^{7} \times 3}\) = 121.54 nm

If the transition takes place from n = 3 to n = 2, then the wavelength of the radiation is given as

This radiation corresponds to the Balmer series of the hydrogen spectrum. Hence, in Lyman series, two wavelengths i. e., 102.54 nm, and 121.55 nm are emitted. And in the Balmer series, one wavelength i. e., 656.33 nm is emitted.

Question 10.
In accordance with the Bohr’s model, find the quantum number that characterizes the earth’s revolution around the sun in an orbit of radius 1.5 x 10¹¹ m with orbital speed 3 x 10⁴ m/s. (Mass of earth = 6.0 x 10²⁴ kg.)
Answer:
Radius of the orbit of the Earth around the Sun, r = 1.5 x 10¹¹ m
Orbital speed of the Earth, v = 3 x 10⁴ m/s
Mass of the Earth, m = 6.0 x 10²⁴ kg
According to Bohr’s model, angular momentum is quantized and given as
mvr = \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)

where, h = Planck’s constant = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
n = Quantum number
∴ n = \(\frac{m v r 2 \pi}{h}\)
= \(\frac{2 \pi \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 3 \times 10^{4} \times 1.5 \times 10^{11}}{6.63 \times 10^{-34}} \) = 25.61 x 10⁷³ = 2.6 x 10⁷⁴
Hence, the quanta number that characterizes the Earth’s revolution is 2.6 x 10⁷⁴.

Additional Exercises

Question 11.
Answer the following questions, which help you to understand the difference between Thomson’s model and Rutherford’s model better.
(a) Is the average angle of deflection of α-particles by a thin gold foil predicted by Thomson’s model much less, about the same, or much greater than that predicted by Rutherford’s model?

(b) Is the probability of backward scattering (i. e., scattering of α-particles at angles greater than 90°) predicted by Thomson’s model much less, about the same, or much greater than that predicted by Rutherford’s model?

(c) Keeping other factors fixed, it is found experimentally that for small thickness t, the number of α-particles scattered at moderate angles is proportional to t. What clue does this linear dependence on t provide?

(d) In which model is it completely wrong to ignore multiple scattering for the calculation of average angle of scattering of α-particles by. a thin foil?
Answer:
(a) The average angle of deflection of α-particles by a thin gold foil predicted by Thomson’s model is about the same size as predicted by Rutherford’s model. This is because the average angle was taken in both models.

(b) The probability of scattering of α-particles at angles greater than 90° predicted by Thomson’s model is much less than that predicted by Rutherford’s model. This is because there is no such massive central core called the nucleus in Rutherford’s model.

(c) Scattering is mainly due to single collisions. The chances of a single collision increase linearly with the number of target atoms. Since the number of target atoms increases with an increase in thickness, the collision probability depends linearly on the thickness of the target.

(d) It is wrong to ignore multiple scattering in Thomson’s model for the calculation of average angle of scattering of α-particles by a thin foil. This is because a single collision causes very little deflection in this model. Hence, the observed average scattering angle can be explained only by considering multiple scattering.

Question 12.
The gravitational attraction between electron and proton in a hydrogen atom is weaker than the Coulomb attraction by a factor of about 10^-40. An alternative way of looking at this fact is to estimate the radius of the first Bohr orbit of a hydrogen atom if the electron and proton were bound by gravitational attraction. You will find the answer interesting.
Answer:
Radius of the first Bohr orbit is given by the relation,
r₁ = \(\frac{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right)^{2}}{m_{e} e^{2}}\) ……………….. (i)
where, ε₀ = Permittivity of free space
h = Planck’s constant = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
m_e = Mass of an electron = 9.1 x 10^-31 kg
e = Charge of an electron = 1.9x 10^-19C
m_p = Mass of a proton = 1.67 x 10^-27 kg
r = Distance between the electron and the proton Coulomb attraction between an electron and a proton is given as
F_C = \(\frac{e^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r^{2}} \) ………………………….. (2)

Gravitational force of attraction between an electron and a proton is
F_G = \(\frac{G m_{p} m_{e}}{r^{2}}\) ……………………………………. (3)
where, G = Gravitational constant = 6.67 x 10^-11 N m²/kg²
If the electrostatic (Coulomb) force and the gravitational force between an electron and a proton are equal, then we can write
∴ F_G = F_C
\(\frac{G m_{p} m_{e}}{r^{2}}\) = \(\frac{e^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}\)
\(\frac{e^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}\) = Gm_pm_e …………………………. (4)
Putting the value of equation (4) in equation (1), we get

Question 13.
Obtain an expression for the frequency of radiation emitted when a hydrogen atom de-excites from level n to level (n -1). For large n, show that this frequency equals the classical frequency of revolution of the electron in the orbit.
Answer:
It is given that a hydrogen atom de-excites from an upper level (n) to a lower level (n —1). We have the relation for energy (E₁) of radiation at level n as
E₁ = hv₁ = \(\frac{h m e^{4}}{(4 \pi)^{3} \varepsilon_{0}^{2}\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right)^{3}} \times\left(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\right)\)
where, v₁ = Frequency of radiation at level n
h = Planck’s constant
m = Mass of hydrogen atom
e = Charge on an electron
ε_o = Permittivity of free space

Now, the relation for energy (E₂) of radiation at level (n -1) is given as
E₂ = hv₂ = \(\frac{h m e^{4}}{(4 \pi)^{3} \varepsilon_{0}^{2}\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right)^{3}} \times \frac{1}{(n-1)^{2}}\) ………………………… (2)
where, v₂ = Frequency of radiation at level (n -1)
Energy (E) released as a result of de-excitation
E = E₂ – E₁ hv= E₂ – E ₁ ………………….. (3)
where, v = Frequency of radiation emitted
Putting values from equations (1) and (2) in equation (3), we get

For large n, we can write (2 n -1) ≈ 2 n and (n-1) ≈ n.
V = \(\frac{m e^{4}}{32 \pi^{3} \varepsilon_{0}^{2}\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right)^{3} n^{3}} \)
∵ v = \(\frac{m e^{4}}{32 \pi^{3} \varepsilon_{0}^{2}\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right)^{3} n^{3}}\) ………………….. (4)
Classical relation of frequency of revolution of an electron is given as
V_c = \(\frac{v}{2 \pi r}\) ……………………………….. (5)
where, velocity of the electron in the n^th orbit is given as
v = \(\frac{e^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right) n}\) ……………………………… (5)
And, radius of the n^th orbit is given as
v = \(\frac{e^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right) n}\) ………………………………(6)
Putting the values of equations (6) and (7) in equation (5), we get
V_c = \( \frac{m e^{4}}{32 \pi^{3} \varepsilon_{0}^{2}\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right)^{3} n^{3}}\)
Hence, the frequency of radiation emitted by the hydrogen atom is equal to its classical orbital frequency.

Question 14.
Classically, an electron can be in any orbit around the nucleus of an atom. Then what determines the typical atomic size? Why is an atom not, say, a thousand times bigger than its typical size? The question had greatly puzzled Bohr before he arrived at his famous model of the atom that you have learnt in the text.

To simulate what he might well have done before his discovery, let us play as follows with the basic constants of nature and see if we can get a quantity with the dimensions of length that is roughly equal to the known size of an atom (~10^-10 m).

(a) Construct a quantity with the dimensions of length from the fundamental constants e, me and c. Determine its numerical value.

(b) You will find that the length obtained in (a) is many orders of magnitude smaller than the atomic dimensions. Further, it involves c. But energies of atoms are mostly in non-relativistic domain where c is not expected to play any role. This is what may have suggested Bohr to discard c and look for ‘something else’ to get the right atomic size. Now, the Planck’s constant h had already made its appearance elsewhere. Bohr’s great insight lay in recognizing that h, me, and e will yield the right atomic size.

Construct a quantity with the dimension of length from h, me, and e and confirm that its numerical value has indeed the correct order of magnitude.
Answer:
(a) Charge on an electron, e = 1.6 x 10^-19 C
Mass of an electron, m_e = 9.1 x 10^-31 kg
Speed of light, c = 3 x 10⁸ m/s
Let us take a quantity involving the given quantities as \(\left(\frac{e^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} m_{e} c^{2}}\right)\)
where, ε₀ = Permittivity of free space and, \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\) = 9 x 10⁹ Nm²C^-2 .
The numerical value of the taken quantity will be

Hence, the numerical value of the taken quantity is much smaller than the typical size of an atom.

(b) Charge on an electron, e = 1.6 x 10^-19 C
Mass of an electron, me = 9.1 x 10^-31 kg
Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 x 10^-34 Js
Let us take a quantity involving the given quantities as \(\frac{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right)^{2}}{m_{e} e^{2}}\)
where, ε₀ = Permittivity of free space
and, \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\) = 9 x 10⁹Nm²C^-2

The numerical value of the taken quantity will be
\(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \times \frac{\left(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\right)^{2}}{m_{e} e^{2}}=9 \times 10^{9} \times \frac{\left(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{2 \times 3.14}\right)^{2}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times\left(1.6 \times 10^{-19}\right)^{2}} \)
= 0.53 x 10^-10 m
Hence, the value of the quantity taken is of the order of the atomic size.

Question 15.
The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of the hydrogen atom is about -3.4 eV.
(a) What is the kinetic energy of the electron in this state?
(b) What is the potential energy of the electron in this state?
(c) Which of the answers above would change if the choice of the zero of potential energy is changed?
Answer:
(a) Total energy of the electron, E = -3.4 eV ’
Kinetic energy of the electron is equal to the negative of the total energy.
⇒ K = -E
= -(-3.4) = + 3.4 eV
Hence, the kinetic energy of the electron in the given state is + 3.4 eV.

(b) Potential energy (JJ) of the electron is equal to the negative of twice of its kinetic energy.
⇒ U = -2 K
= -2 x 3.4 = -6.8 eV
Hence, the potential energy of the electron in the given state is -6.8 eV.

(c) The potential energy of a system depends on the reference point taken. Here, the potential energy of the reference point is taken as zero. If the reference point is changed, then the value of the potential energy of the system also changes. Since total energy is the sum of kinetic and potential energies, total energy of the system will also change.

Question 16.
If Bohr’s quantization postulate (angular momentum = nh/2π) is a basic law of nature, it should be equally valid for the case of planetary motion also. Why then do we never speak of quantization of orbits of planets around the sun?
Answer:
We never speak of quantization of orbits of planets around the Sun because the angular momentum associated with planetary motion is largely relative to the value of Planck’s constant (h).
The angular momentum of the Earth in its orbit is of the order of 10⁷⁰h. This leads to a very high value of quantum levels n of the order of 10⁷⁰.
For large values of n, successive energies and angular momenta are relatively very small. Hence, the quantum levels for planetary motion are considered continuous.

Question 17.
Obtain the first Bohr’s radius and the ground state energy of a muonic hydrogen atom an atom in which a negatively
charged muon (μ^– ) of mass about 207 m_e orbits around a proton.
Answer:
Muonic hydrogen is the atom in which a negatively charged muon of mass about 207 m_e revolves around a proton.
In Bohr’s atom model, r ∝ \(\frac{1}{m}\)
∵ \(\frac{r_{\text {muon }}}{r_{\text {electron }}}=\frac{m_{e}}{m_{\mu}}=\frac{m_{e}}{207 m_{e}}=\frac{1}{207}\) [ ∵m_μ = 207 m_e]
Here, r_e is radius of orbit of electron in hydrogen atom is 0.53 Å.

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Physics Book Solutions Chapter 3 Current Electricity Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Physics Chapter 3 Current Electricity

PSEB 12th Class Physics Guide Current Electricity Textbook Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The storage battery of a car has an emf of 12 V. If the internal resistance of the battery is 0.4 Ω, what is the maximum current that can be drawn from the battery?
Answer:
Emf of the battery, E = 12 V
Internal resistance of the battery, r = 0.4 Ω
Maximum current drawn from the battery = I
According to Ohm’s law,
E = Ir
I = \(\frac{12}{0.4}\) = 30
The maximum current drawn from the given battery is 30 A.

Question 2.
A battery of emf 10 V and internal resistance 3 Ω is connected to a resistor. If the current in the circuit is 0.5 A, what is the resistance of the resistor? What is the terminal voltage of the battery when the circuit is closed?
Answer:
Emf of the battery, E = 10 V
Internal resistance of the battery, r = 3 Ω
Current in the circuit, I = 0.5 A
Resistance of the resistor = R
The relation for current using Ohm’s law is,
I = \(\frac{E}{R+r}\)
R + r = \(\frac{E}{I}\)
= \(\frac{10}{0.5}\) = 20Ω
∴ R = 20 – 3 = 17Ω
Terminal voltage of the battery = V
According to Ohm’s law,
V = IR
= 0.5 × 17 = 8.5 V
Therefore, the resistance of the resistor is 17 Ω and the terminal voltage of the battery is 8.5 V.

Question 3.
(a) Three resistors 1Ω, 2 Ω and 3 Ω are combined in series. What is the total resistance of the combination?
(b) If the combination is connected to a battery of emf 12 V and negligible internal resistance, obtain the potential drop across each resistor.
Answer:
(a) r₁ = 1Ω, r₂ = 2Ω, r₃ = 3Ω
R_S = ?
R_S = r₁ + r₂ + r₃ = 6Ω

(b) ∵ V = 12 V
R_S = 6Ω
I = ?
∵ V = IR_S
⇒ I = \(\) = 2A
Let V₁,V₂, V₃ be the potential drops across r₁ r₂, r₃. Then,
> V = V₁ + V₂ + V₃
V₁ = =Ir₁ = 2 × 1 = 2V
V₂ =Ir₂ = 2 × 2 = 4 V
V₃ = Ir₃ = 2 × 3 = 6V

Question 4.
(a) Three resistors 2 Ω, 4 Ω and 5 Ω are combined in parallel. What is the total resistance of the combination?
(b) If the combination is connected to a battery of emf 20 V and negligible internal resistance, determine the current through each resistor and the total current drawn from the battery.
Answer:
(a) r₁ = 2Ω,r₂ = 4Ω,r₃ = 5Ω

Question 5.
At room temperature (27.0°C) the resistance of a heating element is 100 Ω. What is the temperature of the element if the resistance is found to be 117 Ω, given that the temperature coefficient of the material of the resistor is 1.70 × 10^-4 C^-1.
Answer:
Room temperature, T = 27°C
Resistance of the heating element at T, R = 100 Ω
Let Ti is the increased temperature of the element.
Resistance of the heating element at T₁,R₁ = 117 Ω
Temperature co-efficient of the material of the element,
α = 1.70 × 10^-4°C^-1
α is given by the relation,
α = \(\frac{R_{1}-R}{R\left(T_{1}-T\right)}\)
T₁ – T = \(\frac{R_{1}-R}{R \alpha}\)
T₁ – 27 = \(\frac{117-100}{100\left(1.7 \times 10^{-4}\right)}\)
T₁ – 27 = 1000
T₁ = 1000 + 27
T₁ = 1027°C
Therefore, at 1027°C the resistance of the element is 117 Ω.

Question 6.
A negligibly small current is passed through a wire of length 15 m and uniform cross-section 6.0 × 10^-7 m², and its resistance is measured to be 5.0 Ω. What is the resistivity of the material at the temperature of the experiment?
Answer:
Length of the wire, l = 15 m
Area of cross-section of the wire, A = 6.0 × 10^-7 m²
Resistance of the material of the wire, R = 5.0 Ω
Resistivity of the material of the wire = ρ
Resistance is related with the resistivity as
R = ρ\(\frac{l}{A}\)
ρ = \(\frac{R A}{l}\)
= \(\frac{5 \times 6 \times 10^{-7}}{15}\) = 2 × 10^-7Ωm
Therefore, the resistivity of the material is 2 × 10^-7 Ωm.

Question 7.
A silver wire has a resistance of 2.1 Ω at 27.5°C, and a resistance of 2.7Ω at 100°C. Determine the temperature coefficient of resistivity of silver.
Answer:
Temperature, T₁ = 27.5°C
Resistance of the silver wire at T₁, R₁ = 2.1 Ω
Temperature, T₂ = 100 °C
Resistance of the silver wire at T₂, R₂ = 2.7 Ω
Temperature coefficient of resistivity of silver = a It is related with temperature and resistance as
α = \(\frac{R_{2}-R_{1}}{R_{1}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}\)
= \(\frac{2.7-2.1}{2.1(100-27.5)}\) = 0.0039°C^-1
Therefore, the temperature coefficient of resistivity of silver is 0.0039 °C^-1.

Question 8.
A heating element using nichrome connected to a 230 V supply draws an initial current of 3.2 A which settles after a few seconds to a steady value of 2.8 A. What is the steady temperature of the heating element if the room temperature is 27.0°C? Temperature coefficient of resistance of nichrome averaged over the temperature range involved is 1.70 x 10^-4°C^-1.
Answer:
Supply voltage, V = 230 V
Initial current drawn, I₁ = 3.2 A
Initial resistance = R₁, which is given by the relation,
R₁ = \(\frac{V}{I_{1}}=\frac{230}{3.2}\) = 71.87 Ω
Steady state value of the current, I₂ = 2.8 A
Resistance at the steady state = R₂, which is given as
R₂ = \(\frac{230}{2.8}\) = 82.14 Ω
Temperature coefficient of resistance of nichrome, α = 1.70 × 10^-4°C^-1
Initial temperature of nichrome, T₁ = 27.0 °C
Steady state temperature reached by nichrome = T₂
T₂ can be obtained by the relation for α,
α = \(\frac{R_{2}-R_{1}}{R_{1}\left(T_{2}-T_{1}\right)}\)
T₂ – 27°C = \(\frac{82.14-71.87}{71.87 \times 1.7 \times 10^{-4}}\) = 840.5
T₂ = 840.5 + 27 = 867.5°C
Therefore, the steady temperature of the heating element is 867.5°C.

Question 9.
Determine the current in each branch of the network shown in ‘ Fig. 3.30.

Let I be the total current in the circuit.
I₁ = Current flowing through AB.
∴ I – I₁ = Current flowing through AD.
I₂ = Current flowing through BD.
∴ I₁ – I₂ = Current flowing through BC.
and I₁ – I₁ + I₂ = Current flowing through DC.
Applying loop law to ABDA, we get

10I₁ + 5I₂ – 5(I – I₁) = 10
or 3I₁ + I₂ – I = 0 …………….. (1)
Again applying loop law to BCDB, we get
5(I₁ – I₂) – 10(I – I₁ + I₂) -5I₂ = 0 or 15I₁ – 20I₂ – 10I = 0
or 3I₁ – 4I₂ – 2I = 0 …………….. (2)
Applying loop law to ABCEFA, we get
10I + 10I₁ + 5(I₁ – I₂) = 10
or 3F₁ – I₂ + 2I = 2 ………….. (3)
Eqn. (2) + (3) gives, 6I₁ – 5I₂ = 2 …………… (4)
Multiplying eqn. (1) by 2 and then adding to eqn. (4), we get
9I₁ + I₂ = 2 …………… (5)
Eqn. (4) + 5 x eqn. (5) gives,
6I₁ – 5I₂ + 45I₁ +5I₂ = 2 + 10
or 51I₁ = 12
or I₁ = \(\frac{4}{17}\) A …………….. (6)
∴ Current in branch AB,I₁ = \(\frac{4}{17}\)A
∴ From eqns. (5) and (6), we get
I₂ = 2 – 9 x \(\frac{4}{17}\) = –\(\frac{2}{17}\)A
-ve sign shows that 12 is actually from D to B. Now from eqn. (1), we get

Question 10.
(a) In a metre bridge [Fig. 3.27], the balance point is found to be at 39.5 cm from the end A, when the resistor Y is of 12.5 Ω. Determine the resistance of X. Why are the connections between resistors in a Wheatstone or meter bridge made of thick copper strips?
(b) Determine the balance point of the bridge above if X and Y are interchanged.
(c) What happens if the galvanometer and cell are interchanged at the balance point of the bridge? Would the galvanometer show any current?
Answer:
(a) A metre bridge with resistors X and Y is represented in the given figure.

Balance point from end A,l₁ = 39.5 cm
Resistance of the resistor Y = 12.5 Ω
Condition for the balance is given as,

Therefore, the resistance of resistor X is 8.2 Ω.
The connection between resistors in a Wheatstone or metre bridge is made of thick copper strips to minimize the resistance, which is not taken into consideration in the bridge formula.

(b) If X and Y are interchanged, then l₁ and 100 – l₁ get interchanged.
The balance point of the bridge will be 100 – l₁ from A.
100 – l₁ =100 – 39.5 = 60.5 cm
Therefore, the balance point is 60.5 cm from A.

(c) When the galvanometer and cell are interchanged at the balance point of the bridge, the galvanometer will show no deflection. Hence, no current would flow through the galvanometer.

Question 11.
A storage battery of emf 8.0 V and internal resistance 0.5 Ω is being charged by a 120 V dc supply using a series resistor of 15.5 Ω. What is the terminal voltage of the battery during charging? What is the purpose of having a series resistor in the charging circuit?
Answer:
Emf of the storage battery, E = 8.0 V
Internal resistance of the battery, r = 0.5 Ω
DC supply voltage, V = 120 V
Resistance of the resistor, R = 15.5 Ω
Effective voltage in the circuit = V’
R is connected to the storage battery in series. Hence, it can be written as
V’ = V – E
V’= 120 – 8 = 112 V
Current flowing in the circuit = I, which is given by the relation,
I = \(\frac{V^{\prime}}{R^{\prime}+r}\)
= \(\frac{112}{15.5+0.5}=\frac{112}{16}\) = 7A
15.5 + 0.5 16
Voltage across resistor R given by the product, IR = 7 × 15.5 = 108.5 V
∵ DC supply voltage = Terminal voltage of battery+Voltage drop across R
∴ Terminal voltage of battery = 120 -108.5 = 11.5 V
A series resistor in a charging circuit limits the current drawn from the external source. The current will be extremely high in its absence. This is very dangerous.

Question 12.
In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf 1.25 V gives a balance point at 35.0 cm length of the wire. If the cell is replaced by another cell and the balance point shifts to 63.0 cm, what is the emf of the second cell?
Answer:
Emf of the cell, E₁ = 1.25 V
Balance point of the potentiometer,l₁ = 35 cm
The cell is replaced by another cell of emf E₂.
New balance point of the potentiometer, l₂ = 63 cm
The balance condition is given by the relation,
\(\frac{E_{1}}{E_{2}}=\frac{l_{1}}{l_{2}}\)
E₂ = E₁ × \(\frac{l_{2}}{l_{1}}\) = 1.25 × \(\frac{63}{35}\) = 2.25V
Therefore, emf of the second cell is 2.25 V.

Question 13.
The number density of free electrons in a copper conductor estimated in Example 3.1 is 8.5 × 10²⁸ m^-3. How long does an electron take to drift from one end of a wire 3.0 m long to its other end? The area of cross-section of the wire is 2.0 × 10^-6 m² and it is carrying a current of 3.0 A.
Answer:
Here, n = number density of free electrons = 8.5 × 10²⁸ m^-3
l = length of wire = 3m
A = Area of cross-section of wire = 2.0 × 10^-6 m²
I = current in the wire = 3.0 A
e = 1.6 × 10^-19C
Let t = time taken by electron to drift from one end to another of the wire = ?
Using the relation, I – neA v_d, we get
v_d = I/neA
= \(\frac{3}{8.5 \times 10^{28} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 2.0 \times 10^{-6}}\) ms^-1
= 1.103 × 10^-4 ms^-1
∴ t = \(\frac{l}{v_{d}}\) = \(\frac{3}{1.103 \times 10^{-4}}\) = 2.72 × 10⁴ s = 7 h 33 min.

Question 14.
The earth’s surface has a negative surface charge density of 10^-9 Cm^-2. The potential difference of 400 kV between the top of the atmosphere and the surface results (due to the low conductivity of the lower atmosphere) in a current of only 1800 A over the entire globe. If there were no mechanism of sustaining atmospheric electric field, how much time (roughly) would be required to neutralise the earth’s surface? (This never happens in practice because there is a mechanism to replenish electric charges, namely the continual thunderstorms and lightning in different parts of the globe.) (Radius of earth = 6.37 × 10⁶m.)
Answer:
Surface charge density of the earth, σ = 10^-9 Cm ^-2
Current over the entire globe, I = 1800 A .
Radius of the earth, r = 6.37 × 10⁶ m
Surface area of the earth,
A = 4πr²
= 4π × (6.37 × 10⁶)²
= 5.09 × 10¹⁴ m²
Charge on the earth surface,
q = σ × A
= 10^-9 × 5.09 × 10¹⁴
= 5.09 × 10⁵ C
Time taken to neutralise the earth’s surface = t
Current, I = \(\frac{q}{t}\)
t = \(\frac{q}{I}\)
= \(\frac{5.09 \times 10^{5}}{1800}\) = 282.77 s
Therefore, the time taken to neutralize the earth’s surface is 282.77 s.

Question 15.
(a) Six lead-acid type of secondary cells each of emf 2.0 V and internal resistance 0.015 Ω are joined in series to provide a supply to a resistance of 8.5 Ω. What are the current drawn from the supply and its terminal voltage?
(b) A secondary cell after long use has an emf of 1.9 V and a large internal resistance of 380 Ω. What maximum current can be drawn from the cell? Could the cell drive the starting motor of a car?
Answer:
(a) Number of secondary cells, n = 6
Emf of each secondary cell, E = 2.0 V
Internal resistance of each cell, r = 0.015 Ω
Series resistor is connected to the combination of cells.
Resistance of the resistor, R – 8.5 Ω
Current drawn from the supply = I, which is given by the relation,
I = \(\frac{n E}{R+n r}\)
= \(\frac{6 \times 2}{8.5+6 \times 0.015}\)
= \(\frac{12}{8.59}\) = 1.39 A
Terminal voltage, V = IR = 1.39 × 8.5 =11.87 A
Therefore, the current drawn from the supply is 1.39 A and terminal voltage is 11.87 A.

(b) After a long use, emf of the secondary cell, E = 1.9 V
Internal resistance of the cell, r = 380 Ω
Hence, maximum current, I_max = \(\frac{E}{r}=\frac{1.9}{380}\) = 0.005 A

Therefore, the maximum current drawn from the cell is 0.005 A. Since a large current is required to start the motor of a car, the cell cannot be used to start a motor.

Question 16.
Two wires of equal length, one of aluminium and the other of copper have the same resistance. Which of the two wires is lighter? Hence explain why aluminium wires are preferred for overhead power cables. (ρAl = 2.63 × 10^-8 Ω m, ρCu = 1.72 × 10^-8 Ω m, Relative density of A1 = 2.7, of Cu = 8.9.)
Answer:
Resistivity of aluminium, ρAl = 2.63 × 10^-8 Ωm
Relative density of aluminium, d₁ = 2.7
Let l₁be the length of aluminium wire and ₁ be its mass.
Resistance of the aluminium wire = R₁
Area of cross-section of the aluminium wire = A₁
Resistivity of copper, ρCu = 1.72 × 10^-8 Ωm
Relative density of copper, d₂ = 8.9
Let l₂ be the length of copper wire and m₂ be its mass.
Resistance of the copper wire = R₂
Area of cross-section of the copper wire = A₂
R₁ = ρ₁\(\frac{l_{1}}{A_{1}}\) …………… (1)
R₂ = ρ₂\(\frac{l_{2}}{A_{2}}\) …………… (2)
It is given that,

It can be inferred from this ratio that m₁ is less than m₂. Hence, aluminium is lighter than copper.
Since aluminium is lighter, it is preferred for overhead power cables over copper.

Question 17.
What conclusion can you draw from the following observations on a resistor made of alloy manganin?

Answer:
It can be inferred from the given table that the ratio of voltage with current is a Constant, which is equal to 19.7. Hence, manganin is an ohmic conductor i. e., the alloy obeys Ohm’s law. According to Ohm’s law, the ratio of voltage with current is the resistance of the conductor. Hence, the resistance of manganin is 19.7 Ω.

Question 18.
Answer the following questions :
(a) A steady current flows in a metallic conductor of non-uniform cross-section. Which of these quantities is constant along the conductor : current, current density, electric field, drift speed?
(b) Is Ohm’s law universally applicable for all conducting elements?
If not, give examples of elements which do not obey Ohm’s law.
(c) A low voltage supply from which one needs high currents must have very low internal resistance. Why?
(d) A high tension (HT) supply of, say 6 kV must have a very large internal resistance. Why?
Answer:
(a) When a steady current flows in a metallic conductor of non-uniform cross-section, the current flowing through the conductor is constant. Current density, electric field, and drift speed are inversely proportional to the area of cross-section. Therefore, they are not constant.

(b) No, Ohm’s law is not universally applicable for all conducting elements. Vacuum diode semi-conductor is a non-ohmic conductor. Ohm’s law is not valid for it.

(c) According to Ohm’s law, the relation for the potential is V = IR
Voltage (V) is directly proportional to current (I).
R is the internal resistance of the source.
I = \(\frac{V}{R}\)
If V is low, then R must be very low, so that high current can be drawn from the source.

(d) In order to prohibit the current from exceeding the safety limit, a high tension supply must have a very large internal resistance. If the internal resistance is not large, then the current drawn can exceed the safety limits in case of a short circuit.

Question 19.
Choose the correct alternative:
(a) Alloys of metals usually have (greater/less) resistivity than that of their constituent metals.
(b) Alloys usually have much (lower/higher) temperature coefficients of resistance than pure metals.
(c) The resistivity of the alloy manganin is nearly independent of/increases rapidly with increase of temperature.
(d) The resistivity of a typical insulator (e. g., amber) is greater than that of a metal by a factor of the order of (10²² /10³).
Answer:
(a) Alloys of metals usually have greater resistivity than that of their constituent metals.
(b) Alloys usually have much lower temperature coefficients of resistance than pure metals.
(c) The resistivity of the alloy, manganin, is nearly independent of increase of temperature.
(d) The resistivity of a typical insulator is greater than that of a metal by a factor of the order of 10²².

Question 20.
(a) Given n resistors each of resistance R, how will you combine them to get the (i) maximum (ii) minimum effective resistance? What is the ratio of the maximum to minimum resistance?
(b) Given the resistances of 1 Ω, 2 Ω, 3 Ω, how will be combine them to get an equivalent resistance of (i) (11/3) Ω (ii) (11/5) Ω, (iii) 6 Ω, (iv) (6/11) Ω?
(c) Determine the equivalent resistance of networks shown in Fig. 3.31.

Answer:
(a) For maximum resistance, we shall connect all the resistors in series. Maximum resistance
R_max = nR
For minimum resistance, we shall connect all the resistors in parallel. Minimum resistance,
R_min = \(\frac{R}{n}[latex]
Ratio, [latex]\frac{R_{\max }}{R_{\min }}=\frac{n R}{R / n}\) = n²

(b) The combinations are shown in figure.

(c) (a) It can be observed from the given circuit that in the first small loop, two resistors of resistance 1 Ω each are connected in series.
Hence, their equivalent resistance = (1 + 1) = 2Ω
It can also be observed that two resistors of resistance 2Ω each,are
connected in series.
Hence, their equivalent resistance = (2 + 2) = 4Ω.
Therefore, the circuit can be redrawn as:

It can be observed that 2 Ω and 4 Ω resistors are connected in parallel in all the four loops. Hence, equivalent resistance (R’) of each loop is given by,
R’ = \(\frac{2 \times 4}{2+4}=\frac{8}{6}=\frac{4}{3}\)Ω
The circuit reduces to,

All the four resistors are connected in series.
Hence, equivalent resistance of the given circuit is \(\frac{4}{3}\) × 4 = \(\frac{16}{3}\) Ω

(b) It can be observed from the given circuit that five resistors of resistance R each are connected in series.
Hence, equivalent resistance of the circuit = R + R + R + R + R
= 5 R

Question 21.
Determine the current drawn from a 12 V supply with internal resistance 0.5 Ω by the infinite network shown in Fig. 3.32. Each resistor has 1Ω resistance.

Answer:
Let X be the equivalent resistance of the network. Since network is infinite adding one more set of three resistances each of value R = 1 Ω across the terminals will not affect the total resistance i.e., it should still remain equal to X. Thus this network can be represented as :

Let R_eq be the equivalent resistance of this network, then
R_eq = R + equivalent resistance of parallel combination of X and R + R
= R + \(\frac{X R}{X+R}\) + R
= 2 R + \(\frac{X R}{X+R}\)
Addition of 3 resistances to resistance X of infinite network should not alter the total resistance of the infinite network. Thus
R_eq =X
or 2R + \(\frac{X R}{X+R}\) = X
or 2 × 1 + \(\frac{X \times 1}{X+1}\) = 1 (∵ R = 1Ω)
or 2(X + 1) + X = X(X + 1)
or X² – 2X – 2 = 0

Question 22.
Figure 3.33 shows a potentiometer with a cell of 2.0 V and internal resistance 0.40 Ω maintaining a potential drop across the resistor wire AB. A standard cell which maintains a constant emf of 1.02 V (for very moderate currents upto a few mA) gives a balance point at 67.3 cm length of the wire. To ensure very low currents drawn from the standard cell, a very high resistance, of 600 kΩ is put in series with it, which is shorted close to the balance point. The standard cell is then replaced by a cell of unknown emf e and the balance point found similarly, turns out to be at 82.3 cm length of the wire.

(a) What is the value of e ?
(b) What purpose does the high resistance of 600 kΩ have?
(c) Is the balance point affected by this high resistance?
(d) Is the balance point affected by the internal resistance of the driver cell?
(e) Would the method work in the above situation if the driver cell of the potentiometer had an emf of 1.0 V instead of 2.0 V?
(f) Would the circuit work well for determining an extremely small emf, say of the order of a few mV (such as the typical emf of thermo-couple)? If not, how will you modify the circuit?
Answer:
Constant emf of the given standard cell, E₁ = 1.02 V
Balance point on the wire, l₁ = 67.3 cm
A cell of unknown emf, ε, replaced the standard cell. Therefore, new balance point on the wire, l = 82.3 cm.
(a) The relation between connecting emf and balance point is,
\(\frac{E_{1}}{l_{1}}=\frac{\varepsilon}{l}\)
ε = \(\frac{l}{l_{1}}\) × E₁
= \(\frac{82.3}{67.3}[latex] × 1.02 = 1.247 V
The value of unknown emf is 1.247 V.

(b) The purpose of using the high resistance of 600 kΩ is to reduce the current through the galvanometer when the movable contact is far from the balance point.

(c) The balance point is not affected by the presence of high resistance.

(d) The balance point is not affected by the internal resistance of the driver cell.

(e) The method would not work if the driver cell of the potentiometer had an emf of 1.0 V instead of 2.0 V. This is because if the emf of the driver cell of the potentiometer is less than the’ emf of the other cell, then there would be no balance point on the wire.

(f) The circuit would not work well for determining an extremely small emf. As the circuit would be unstable, the balance point would be close to end A. Hence, there would be a large percentage of error.
The given circuit can be modified if a series resistance is connected with the wire AB. The potential drop across AB is slightly greater than the emf measured. The percentage error would be small.

Question 23.
Figure 3.34 shows a potentiometer circuit for comparison of two resistances. The balance point with a standard resistor R = 10.0 Ω is found to be 58.3 cm, while that with the unknown resistance X is 68.5 cm. Determine the value of X. What might you do if you failed to find a balance point with the given cell of emf ε?

Answer:
Resistance of the standard resistor, R = 10.0 Ω
Balance point for this resistance, l₁ = 58.3 cm
Current in the potentiometer wire = i
Hence, potential drop across R,E₁ = iR
Resistance of the unknown resistor = X
Balance point for this resistor, l₂ = 68.5 cm
Hence, potential drop across X, E₂ = iX
The relation between connecting emf and balance point is,
[latex]\frac{E_{1}}{E_{2}}=\frac{l_{1}}{l_{2}}\)
\(\frac{i R}{i X}=\frac{l_{1}}{l_{2}}\)
X = \(\frac{l_{2}}{l_{1}}\) x R = \(\frac{68.5}{58.3}\) x 10 = 11.749 Ω
Therefore, the value of the unknown resistance, X is 11.75 Ω.
If we fail to find a balance point with the given cell of emf, ε, then the potential drop across R and X must be reduced by putting a resistance in series with it. Only if the potential drop across R or X is smaller than the potential drop across the potentiometer wire AB, a balance point is
obtained.

Question 24.
Figure 3.35 shows a 2.0 V potentiometer used for the determination of internal resistance of a 1.5 V cell. The balance point of the cell in open circuit is 76.3 cm. When a resistor of 9.5 Ω is used in the external circuit of the cell, the balance point shifts to 64.8 cm length of the potentiometer wire. Determine the internal resistance of the cell.

Internal resistance of the cell = r
Balance point of the cell in open circuit, l₁ = 76.3 cm
An external resistance (JR) is connected to the circuit with R = 9.5 Ω.
New balance point of the circuit, l₂ = 64.8 cm
Current flowing through the circuit = I
The relation connecting resistance and emf is,
r = (\(\frac{l_{1}-l_{2}}{l_{2}}\))R
= \(\frac{76.3-64.8}{64.8}\) x 9.5 = 1.68 Ω.
Therefore, the internal resistance of the cell is 1.68 Q.